You are on page 1of 249

PSTN Services

Table of Contents i .........................................................................................


Chapter 1 PSTN Basic Services 1-1 ..................................................................
Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN Supplementary Services 2-1 ........
2.1 Service Syntax Analysis 2-1 ....................................................................
2.2 Service Priority 2-1 ..................................................................................
2.3 Service Compatibility 2-1 ........................................................................
Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services 3-1 ...................................................
3.1 180 Service 3-1 .......................................................................................
3.2 Abbreviated Dialing Service 3-5 ..............................................................
3.3 Absent Subscriber Service 3-7 ................................................................
3.4 Automatic Call Memory (ACM) 3-8 .........................................................
3.5 Advice of Charge (AOCE) 3-13 .................................................................
3.6 Assigned Pickup Call in Group 3-15 .........................................................
3.7 Assigned Trunk Line Call 3-17 ..................................................................
3.8 Authentication Service 3-18 ......................................................................
3.9 Black and White Lists 3-20 ........................................................................
3.10 Block the Blocker 3-22 ............................................................................
3.11 Booking Call 3-23 ....................................................................................
3.12 Call Back On Busy 3-25 ..........................................................................
3.13 Call Forward of Hunting Group Service 3-28 ..........................................
3.14 Call Forwarding Busy (CFB) 3-29 ...........................................................
3.15 Call Forwarding No Reply (CFNR) 3-31 ..................................................
3.16 Call Forwarding Restriction 3-34 .............................................................
3.17 Call Forwarding to Voice Mailbox 3-35 ...................................................
3.18 Call Forwarding Unconditional (CFU) 3-37 .............................................
3.19 Call Transfer (CT) 3-40 ...........................................................................
3.20 Call Waiting (CW) 3-42 ...........................................................................
3.21 Call Watch Service 3-45 ..........................................................................
3.22 Caller Forward by Hooking 3-46 .............................................................
3.23 Caller Name Display 3-48 .......................................................................
3.24 Calling Line Identification During Call Waiting (CID during CW) 3-49 .....
3.25 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) 3-51 ...............................
3.26 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) 3-52 ..................................
3.27 Calling Name Per Call Blocking Service 3-54 .........................................
3.28 Calling Name Per Call Unblocking Service 3-55 .....................................
3.29 Calling Name Per Line Blocking Service 3-55 ........................................
3.30 Cancel All Registered Services 3-56 .......................................................
3.31 Cancel Call Waiting 3-57 .........................................................................
3.32 CLIR Override 3-57 .................................................................................
3.33 Conference Calling (CONF) 3-59 ............................................................
3.34 Conference Incoming Call 3-61 ...............................................................
3.35 Delay Hot Line Service 3-63 ...................................................................
3.36 DIC/DLC (Long Distance Collect Call/Local Collect Call) 3-65 ...............
3.37 Do-not-Disturb Service (DDS) 3-69 .........................................................
3.38 Duplex and Distinct Ringing 3-71 ............................................................
3.39 Emergency Call Override 3-72 ................................................................
3.40 Forced Release by Operator 3-74 ...........................................................
3.41 Hunting Group Service 3-76 ....................................................................
3.42 Immediate Hotline 3-77 ...........................................................................
3.43 List Conference Service 3-79 ..................................................................
3.44 Inquiry Service 3-83 ................................................................................
3.45 Making, Modifying and Removing Tones and Announcements
on Line 3-86 ....................................................................................................
3.46 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) Service 3-89 ...................................
3.47 Message Waiting Notification 3-90 ..........................................................
3.48 Modify Password 3-91 .............................................................................
3.49 Multiple Wake-ups 3-92 ..........................................................................
3.50 No Disturb When Calling 3-94 .................................................................
3.51 Number Barring 3-96 ...............................................................................
3.52 Number Incomplete 3-98 .........................................................................
3.53 Number Portability (NP) 3-99 ..................................................................
3.54 Operator Call Barring 3-100 ......................................................................
3.55 Operator Intrusion 3-101 ...........................................................................
3.56 Operator Monitoring 3-103 ........................................................................
3.57 Operator Override DDS 3-105 ..................................................................
3.58 Outgoing Call Barring Service 3-106 .........................................................
3.59 Park on 3-108 ............................................................................................
3.60 Password Call 3-109 .................................................................................
3.61 Playback 3-111 .........................................................................................
3.62 PrePaid Service (PPS) 3-112 ....................................................................
3.63 PPS Feature on Standalone Offices 3-125 ...............................................
3.64 Preselection Service 3-134 .......................................................................
3.65 Priority Subscriber 3-136 ...........................................................................
3.66 Prompt of Incoming Call 3-136 ..................................................................
3.67 Prompt of Number Change 3-138 .............................................................
3.68 Prompt of Outgoing Call 3-140 ..................................................................
3.69 Quick Access Function 3-141 ...................................................................
3.70 Record 3-143 ............................................................................................
3.71 Registration and Cancellation of CF Service (CFU/CFNR/CFB) 3-145 ....
3.72 Registered Call 3-148 ...............................................................................
3.73 Remote Activation of the CFB Service 3-151 ............................................
3.74 Remote Activation of the CFNR Service 3-153 .........................................
3.75 Remote Activation of the CFU Service 3-156 ...........................................
3.76 Secretary Service 3-158 ............................................................................
3.77 Secretary Station Service 3-161 ...............................................................
3.78 Single Call Multi-Display Service 3-163 ....................................................
3.79 Telephone Set Self-Test 3-165 .................................................................
3.80 Temporary Booking CLIP and CLIR 3-166 ...............................................
3.81 Temporary Call Transfer 3-171 .................................................................
3.82 Three-Party Service (3PTY) 3-173 ............................................................
3.83 Toll Call Indication Service 3-175 ..............................................................
3.84 Trunk Interrupt 3-177 ................................................................................
3.85 Trunk Intrusion 3-179 ................................................................................
3.86 Trunk Monitoring 3-180 .............................................................................
3.87 Two-Stage Dialing 3-182 ...........................................................................
3.88 Wake up (Alarm) Service 3-184 ................................................................
Centrex Services
Table of Contents i .........................................................................................
Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services 1-1 .....................................................
Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services 2-1 ...............................................................
2.1 Basic Call Services 2-1 ...........................................................................
2.2 Centrex Operator Services 2-2 ...............................................................
Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services 3-1 ................................................
ISDN Services
Table of Contents i .........................................................................................
Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System 1-1 .......................................................
1.1 Features of the C&C08 EV ISDN 1-1 ......................................................
1.2 Network Structure and Signaling Composition of C&C08 EV
ISDN 1-2 .......................................................................................................
1.2.1 ISDN Network Structure 1-2 ...........................................................
1.2.2 ISDN Signaling Composition 1-3 ....................................................
1.2.3 ISDN Interface 1-4 ..........................................................................
Chapter 2 ISDN Services 2-1 .............................................................................
2.1 Basic Services 2-2 ..................................................................................
2.2 Bearer Services 2-3 ................................................................................
2.3 User Integrated Services 2-5 ..................................................................
2.4 Supplementary Services 2-6 ...................................................................
2.5 Centrex Services 2-19 ...............................................................................
Appendix
Table of Contents i .........................................................................................
Appendix A Relationship between Different Services A-1 ..................................
Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations B-1 ....................................................


HUAWEI


1. PSTN Services

2. Centrex Services

3. ISDN Services

4. Appendix





C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
OVSV610R103


C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
Operation Manual

Volume Supplementary Services Volume
Manual Version T2-011655-20040330-C-4.02
Product Version OVSV610R103
BOM 31160755

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company
headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com



Copyright 2004 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co.,
Ltd.
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.


About This Manual
Release Notes
The product version that corresponds to the manual is the C&C08 EV Digital SPC
Switching System OVSV610R103.
Related Manuals
The following manuals provide more information about the C&C08 EV Digital SPC
Switching System.
Manual Content
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching
System Maintenance Manual
It consists of two volumes. The Troubleshooting Volume
details on how to locate and process common faults in the
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System, while the Routine
Maintenance Volume offers operational methods and
maintenance suggestions for routine maintenance and
special maintenance.
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching
System Technical Manual
It offers an overall introduction to the C&C08 EV Digital SPC
Switching System, including the system structure, hardware
functions, software functions, services and applications.
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching
System Operation Manual
It is used for assisting the users in data configurations and
typical applications.
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching
System Installation Manual
It provides information for the system installation, including
the installation of the cabinets, cables, power system and
various boards.
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching
System Board Manual
It introduces almost all the boards available in the C&C08
EV Digital SPC Switching System. For each board, it
describes its functions, features, interface signal, functional
principle and technical Indexes.

Organization
The manual describes the services and functions provided by the C&C08 EV Switch
and gives the instructions of how to implement the above-mentioned functions.
There are three independent parts and two appendixes in the manual.

PSTN Services elaborates on the PSTN services (including basic services and
supplementary services) and the operation methods of the PSTN supplementary
services.
Centrex Services focuses on the Centrex conception and services (including
basic services and supplementary services) and the operation methods of the
Centrex value added services.
ISDN Services describes the ISDN conception and services (including basic
services and supplementary services) and the operation methods of the ISDN
supplementary services.
Appendix A Relationship between Different Services offers the relationship
between different services.
Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations collects the acronyms and
abbreviations used in the manual.
Intended Audience
The manual is intended for the following readers:
Marketing staff
Technical personnel
Operation & maintenance personnel
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention Description
Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Arial Narrow Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.
Boldface Headings are in Boldface.
Courier New Terminal Display is in Courier New.

II. Command conventions
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.
italic Command arguments are in italic.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.
One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated
by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A
minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ] *
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated
by vertical bars. Many or none can be selected.

III. GUI conventions
Convention Description
< > Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click <OK> button.
[ ]
Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside
square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.
/
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example,
[File/Create/Folder].

IV. Keyboard operation
Format Description
<Key>
Press the key with the key name inside angle brackets. For example,
<Enter>, <Tab>, <Backspace>, or <A>.
<Key1+Key2>
Press the keys concurrently. For example, <Ctrl+Alt+A> means the three
keys should be pressed concurrently.
<Key1, Key2>
Press the keys in turn. For example, <Alt, A> means the two keys should
be pressed in turn.

V. Mouse operation
Action Description
Click Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default).
Double Click Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.
Drag Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.


VI. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.
Note: Means a complementary description.




HUAWEI








C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
Operation Manual Supplementary Services
Volume
PSTN Services






Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

i
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 PSTN Basic Services................................................................................................... 1-1
Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN Supplementary Services.................................... 2-1
2.1 Service Syntax Analysis .................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Service Priority................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Service Compatibility ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services .................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 180 Service........................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Abbreviated Dialing Service............................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Absent Subscriber Service ................................................................................................ 3-7
3.4 Automatic Call Memory (ACM) .......................................................................................... 3-8
3.5 Advice of Charge (AOCE)................................................................................................ 3-13
3.6 Assigned Pickup Call in Group ........................................................................................ 3-15
3.7 Assigned Trunk Line Call ................................................................................................. 3-17
3.8 Authentication Service..................................................................................................... 3-18
3.9 Black and White Lists ...................................................................................................... 3-20
3.10 Block the Blocker ........................................................................................................... 3-22
3.11 Booking Call ................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.12 Call Back On Busy......................................................................................................... 3-25
3.13 Call Forward of Hunting Group Service......................................................................... 3-28
3.14 Call Forwarding Busy (CFB) .......................................................................................... 3-29
3.15 Call Forwarding No Reply (CFNR) ................................................................................ 3-31
3.16 Call Forwarding Restriction............................................................................................ 3-34
3.17 Call Forwarding to Voice Mailbox .................................................................................. 3-35
3.18 Call Forwarding Unconditional (CFU) ............................................................................ 3-38
3.19 Call Transfer (CT) .......................................................................................................... 3-40
3.20 Call Waiting (CW) .......................................................................................................... 3-42
3.21 Call Watch Service ........................................................................................................ 3-45
3.22 Caller Forward by Hooking ............................................................................................ 3-47
3.23 Caller Name Display...................................................................................................... 3-48
3.24 Calling Line Identification During Call Waiting (CID during CW) ................................... 3-49
3.25 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) .............................................................. 3-51
3.26 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) ................................................................. 3-53
3.27 Calling Name Per Call Blocking Service........................................................................ 3-55
3.28 Calling Name Per Call Unblocking Service ................................................................... 3-56
3.29 Calling Name Per Line Blocking Service....................................................................... 3-56
3.30 Cancel All Registered Services ..................................................................................... 3-56
3.31 Cancel Call Waiting ....................................................................................................... 3-58
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

ii
3.32 CLIR Override................................................................................................................ 3-58
3.33 Conference Calling (CONF)........................................................................................... 3-60
3.34 Conference Incoming Call ............................................................................................. 3-62
3.35 Delay Hot Line Service .................................................................................................. 3-64
3.36 DIC/DLC (Long Distance Collect Call/Local Collect Call).............................................. 3-66
3.37 Do-not-Disturb Service (DDS) ....................................................................................... 3-70
3.38 Duplex and Distinct Ringing........................................................................................... 3-71
3.39 Emergency Call Override............................................................................................... 3-72
3.40 Forced Release by Operator ......................................................................................... 3-74
3.41 Hunting Group Service .................................................................................................. 3-76
3.42 Immediate Hotline.......................................................................................................... 3-77
3.43 List Conference Service................................................................................................. 3-79
3.44 Inquiry Service ............................................................................................................... 3-83
3.45 Making, Modifying and Removing Tones and Announcements on Line ....................... 3-86
3.46 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) Service.................................................................. 3-89
3.47 Message Waiting Notification ........................................................................................ 3-90
3.48 Modify Password ........................................................................................................... 3-91
3.49 Multiple Wake-ups ......................................................................................................... 3-92
3.50 No Disturb When Calling ............................................................................................... 3-94
3.51 Number Barring.............................................................................................................. 3-96
3.52 Number Incomplete ....................................................................................................... 3-98
3.53 Number Portability (NP)................................................................................................. 3-99
3.54 Operator Call Barring................................................................................................... 3-100
3.55 Operator Intrusion........................................................................................................ 3-101
3.56 Operator Monitoring..................................................................................................... 3-103
3.57 Operator Override DDS ............................................................................................... 3-105
3.58 Outgoing Call Barring Service ..................................................................................... 3-106
3.59 Park on......................................................................................................................... 3-108
3.60 Password Call .............................................................................................................. 3-109
3.61 Playback ...................................................................................................................... 3-111
3.62 PrePaid Service (PPS) ................................................................................................ 3-112
3.63 PPS Feature on Standalone Offices............................................................................ 3-125
3.64 Preselection Service.................................................................................................... 3-134
3.65 Priority Subscriber ....................................................................................................... 3-136
3.66 Prompt of Incoming Call .............................................................................................. 3-136
3.67 Prompt of Number Change.......................................................................................... 3-138
3.68 Prompt of Outgoing Call .............................................................................................. 3-140
3.69 Quick Access Function ................................................................................................ 3-141
3.70 Record ......................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.71 Registration and Cancellation of CF Service (CFU/CFNR/CFB)................................. 3-145
3.72 Registered Call ............................................................................................................ 3-148
3.73 Remote Activation of the CFB Service ........................................................................ 3-151
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

iii
3.74 Remote Activation of the CFNR Service ..................................................................... 3-153
3.75 Remote Activation of the CFU Service........................................................................ 3-156
3.76 Secretary Service ........................................................................................................ 3-158
3.77 Secretary Station Service ............................................................................................ 3-161
3.78 Single Call Multi-Display Service................................................................................. 3-163
3.79 Telephone Set Self-Test .............................................................................................. 3-165
3.80 Temporary Booking CLIP and CLIR............................................................................ 3-166
3.81 Temporary Call Transfer.............................................................................................. 3-171
3.82 Three-Party Service (3PTY) ........................................................................................ 3-173
3.83 Toll Call Indication Service .......................................................................................... 3-175
3.84 Trunk Interrupt ............................................................................................................. 3-177
3.85 Trunk Intrusion............................................................................................................. 3-179
3.86 Trunk Monitoring.......................................................................................................... 3-180
3.87 Two-Stage Dialing ....................................................................................................... 3-182
3.88 Wake up (Alarm) Service............................................................................................. 3-184

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 PSTN Basic Services

1-1
Chapter 1 PSTN Basic Services
The basic service of Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) refers to the basic
call connection functions provided by the switch, including inter-office call, local call,
national toll call, international toll call, tandem call and others. The following is a brief
description of all kinds of calls.
I. Intra-office call
The intra-office call is the call connection initiated by two subscribers in the same
office. In the case of the C&C08 EV switching system, it is a call connection between
two Switching Module (SM)s managed by one Administration Module
(AM)/Communication Module (CM) or inside an SM. Calls of this kind do not occupy
such resources as trunk.
II. Local call
The C&C08 EV switching system can provide call connections between local network
subscribers (including municipal subscribers, rural subscribers and county
subscribers) as well as call connections between remote module subscribers and
subscriber concentrator subscribers.
III. National toll call
The C&C08 EV switching system can provide the subscriber with the outgoing service
of automatic national distance dialing and the automatic incoming service of national
toll. It is the call connection realized by selecting routes and sub-routes and
occupying trunk resources.
IV. International toll call
International toll call is of two types: International automatic call connections and
International semi-automatic connections. The C&C08 EV switching system can
provide the subscriber with the function of international toll call, including the outgoing
service of automatic international direct distance dialing and the automatic incoming
service of international toll.
V. Tandem call
The C&C08 EV switching system can provide the trunk-tandem forwarding service of
national toll and international toll.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN
Supplementary Services

2-1
Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN
Supplementary Services
Different countries and different regions may have different requirements for the same
PSTN supplementary services, such as priority and compatibility between different
services. The C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System adopts the following methods
to solve the problems.
2.1 Service Syntax Analysis
For the same PSTN supplementary services, the standards and telecommunication
operators of the different countries and regions may have different demands on
dialing. Now take Abbreviated Dialing for example. In different countries and regions,
the subscriber registration and the dialing mode of abbreviated dialing service may be
different. By adopting external data to describe the input format of supplementary
service, C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System specifies the service input format
according to the requirement of the different countries and regions, thus enabling the
different input formats of the same service in multiple countries and regions.
2.2 Service Priority
For the same PSTN supplementary service, the standards and telecommunication
operators of the different countries and regions may have different demands on
priority. Now take the priority between Call Forwarding Unconditional service and
Do-not-Disturb Service for example. It may be required by some regions that the
incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally when a subscriber is registered with
both Do-not-Disturb Service and Call Forwarding Unconditional service; while in other
regions, the Do-not-Disturb Service may have priority in such a case. By adopting the
external data to describe the priority of the conflicting supplementary services, The
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System specifies the priority of different services
according to the requirement of different countries and regions, thus enabling different
services with different priorities in multiple countries and regions.
2.3 Service Compatibility
For the same PSTN supplementary services, the standards and telecommunication
operators of the different countries and regions may have different demands on
compatibility. Now take the priority between the Call Forwarding Unconditional service
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN
Supplementary Services

2-2
and the Do-not-Disturb Service for example. In some counties and regions, such as
China, these two services are not compatible. Therefore, the subscriber registered
with the Call Forwarding Unconditional service cannot register the Do-not-Disturb
Service, and conversely is the same case. However, other countries or regions may
want to distinguish them through service priority. By adopting the external data to
describe the compatibility of the conflicting supplementary services, The C&C08 EV
Digital SPC Switching System specifies the compatibility of different services
according to the requirement of the different countries and regions, thus enabling
different services with different compatiblities in multiple countries and regions.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-1
Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
Before using a service, carry out the ADD CNACLD command to add the service prefix. Otherwise, the
service will be unavailable.
Both the administrator and authorized subscriber can activate and deactivate a service. That is, the
administrator can carry out the REG NSV command to activate a service and the RMV NSV command to
deactivate a service, and an authorized subscriber can activate and deactivate a service on a telephone
through dialing the access code. Only the last setting is effective.

3.1 180 Service
I. Meaning
The 180 service is for the inquiry of call charge. A subscriber can know the charge of
his last call and his total call charge through dialing a prefix after the completion of a
call.
The 180 service is available only for subscribers of an end office and only ST, DSL
and V5ST subscribers can use it.
II. Data configuration
Configuring the prefix
Carry out the ADD CNACLD command to configure the prefix of the 180 service. Set
the [SERVICE CATEGORY] parameter to "supplementary service" and the [SERVICE
ATTRIBUTE] parameter to "DCHGI(query charging information by DTMF)". The
[SERVICE SEQUENCE NUMBER] parameter ranges from 0 to 5. If this parameter is
set to a value greater than 5, subscribers will hear the busy tone after dialing the
prefix. The values 0~5 stand for the following meanings:
0: Announces the meter count of the last call of a subscriber.
1: Announces the total meter count of a subscriber.
2: Announces the meter count of the last call and the total meter count of a subscriber
(including 0 and 1).
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-2
3: Announces the charge of the last call of a subscriber.
4: Announces the total call charge of a subscriber.
5: Announces the charge of the last call and total call charge of a subscriber
(including 3 and 4).
The default data has configured the prefixes 1800~1805 to send the above six voice
announcements respectively.
Setting the maximum number of service subscribers
Carry out the MOD SMP/LST MDU command to set the maximum number of tuples
of the 180 service dynamic table. The maximum number of tuples of the table
determines the maximum number of subscribers who can successfully use the 180
service. Set the [PARAMETER] to "maximum number of 180 service subscribers".
The default value is 200.
After the modification of the maximum number of tuples, format the data and load it,
then the modification takes effect. Therefore, it is recommended to set a proper
maximum number of tuples for the table according to actual requirements at first so
as to avoid reloading the system.
Backing up data
Carry out the BKP NSV command to back up the 180 service data in the active
MPU/SPC board to the BAM. After resetting or re-startup, the host will automatically
load the 180 service data from the BAM to the foreground. Set the
[SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE ID] parameter to "play charge info".
Bit 10 of the software parameter P55 controls whether the switch supports real-time
backup.
=1: Not support (default value). The BAM will back up supplementary service data at
specified intervals.
=0: Support
Configuring voice announcement data
When voice channels are adequate, the SM uses the SIG board to play voice
announcements and supports simultaneous voice announcement of 20 channels,
while the SPM supports simultaneous voice announcement of 200 channels.
When no voice channel is available for a call, the switch first plays a voice
announcement like "The line is busy now. Please try again later".
Carry out the MOD SIGSET command to modify the voice configuration data of some
supplementary services in the SIG/SPD board. The 180-service uses the signal
indexes 95 and 96 (that is, TID) whose [SEND SOUND TYPE] parameter is set to
"synchronous signal". By default, each index has three voice files as follows.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-3
The voice files whose signal index is 95 are for the announcements of meter counts
of calls. Its three files are FFFFF85F, FFFFF880 and FFFFF881.
FFFFF85F is the leading voice announcement and the switch plays it each time. If it
is not needed, record a one-second silence.
FFFFF880 contains the announcement of the meter count of the last call of a
subscriber. Record it like "Your last call METER count is".
FFFFF881 contains the announcement of the total meter count of a subscriber.
Record it like "Your total call METER count is".
The voice files whose signal index is 96 are for the announcements of call charges.
Its three files are FFFFF860, FFFFF882 and FFFFF883.
FFFFF860 is the leading voice announcement and the switch plays it each time. If it is
not needed, record a one-second silence.
FFFFF882 contains the announcement of the charge of the last call of a subscriber.
Record it like "Your last call FEE cost is".
FFFFF883 contains the announcement of the total call charge of a subscriber. Record
it like "Your total call FEE cost is".
III. Operations
To offer the 180 service for a subscriber, just carry out the MOD NSR command and
set the [SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE] parameter to "play charging info".
After the operator adds the service authority for a subscriber and online sends the
subscriber data to the host, the switch will automatically add a record to the
180-service dynamic table and set its value to 0. Therefore, before the addition of the
180 service authority for a subscriber, first check the maximum number of tuples of
the 180-service dynamic table. Otherwise, the addition of 180 service data will fail.
The cancellation of the 180 service authority of a subscriber will cause the switch to
delete the corresponding data in the 180-service dynamic table. After the deletion, the
original data cannot be recovered. If to re-add the service authority for the subscriber,
all the service data of the subscriber will be initialized to 0. Therefore, take care when
canceling the 180 service authority of a subscriber.
IV. Related commands
LST NSVUSER
You can carry out the LST NSVUSER command to list the total number of the 180
service subscribers of an office and their detailed information. Set the
[SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE] parameter to "play charge info".
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-4
DSP NSV
You can carry out the DSP NSV command to view the records in the backed-up
180-service dynamic table on the background. Set the [SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE]
parameter to "play charge info".
V. Charge accumulation
The 180-service dynamic table accumulates only the charges of metering bills and
detailed bills. The following cases are possible.
Calls for which the switch generates only detailed bills
In this case, the switch refreshes only the accumulated charges in the 180-service
dynamic table and will not refresh corresponding meters.
Calls for which the switch only refreshes corresponding metering bills
In this case, the switch refreshes not only the accumulated charges in the 180-service
dynamic table but also corresponding meters. The charges are calculated directly
according to the tariffs of the meters.
Calls for which the switch generates not only detailed bills but also refreshes
corresponding metering bills
In this case, the 180-service dynamic table refreshes the meter and charge only one
time and will not add the charge again to the total charge. It is similar to the above
case. Take care not to add the charge again to the 180-service dynamic table.
Calls for which the switch generates no bill
In this case, according to current processing mode, the switch will not refresh the
180-service data, that is, neglect the charge of the call and have no change of the
180-service data.

Note:
There is no special supplementary service charging method for the 180 service. Use a common
charging method to charge it.
The 180 service records only the charge of the charging mode that the calling or called party is
charged. For calls involving hooking, the switch considers only the charges of the subscriber in these
bills.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-5
3.2 Abbreviated Dialing Service
I. Meaning
To facilitate calling, the subscribers can set a short code (2 digits) to represent a
number. This number can be local number, national toll number, or international toll
number, and the latter two shall include the national or international prefix. Each
subscriber can have several abbreviated numbers.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "abbreviated dialing" authority (you can use the command:
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
MN 2-digit abbreviated number (0<=M, N<=9)
TN Telephone number of Subscriber B
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*51*MN*TN#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the successful
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials **MN
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-6
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A dials #51*MN#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
Suppose the number of Subscriber B is 8883850 (that is, "TN" is 8883850), and its
abbreviated number "MN" is 12 (0<=M, N<=9), the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*51*12*8883850#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials **12
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #51*12#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-7
Note:
This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
If the same MN has been registered for several times, only the number registered for the last time is
valid.
This service can also abbreviate the called number to 1 digit, using the same registration, operation
and cancellation method.

3.3 Absent Subscriber Service
I. Meaning
If a subscriber has "absent subscriber service" registered, when dialing the number of
the subscriber (the callee), the caller will hear the absent subscriber service tone.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "absent subscriber service" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber.
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *50# (on DTMF phone) or
150 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
When a subscriber dials the number of Subscriber A, he/she will hear the absent
subscriber service tone.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-8
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A dials #50# (on DTMF phone) or
151150 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and call forwarding busy.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and call forwarding unconditional.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and call forwarding no reply.
When applying for the absent subscriber service, the subscriber cannot use the malicious call
identification service.
When the absent subscriber service is registered, the subscriber will not have the call waiting
function.
If a subscriber has activated both the absent service and do not disturb service, the switch gives
priority to the do not disturb service.
This service cannot be used simultaneously along with the call back on busy service.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and wake up service.

3.4 Automatic Call Memory (ACM)
I. Meaning
With the automatic call memory service, the switch saves the caller number of the last
call that the service subscriber didn't answer. Later, when the subscriber uses the
phone, he/she will know the last phone number who calls him/her through dialing a
special service code. Moreover, the switch offers the callback function.
The ACM service is available on both the SM and SPM. For the SM, it is the SPT
board or SPM voice resource that sends voice announcements (for related data
configuration, refer to the following part "Data configuration"). For the SPM, it is the
SPD board that sends voice announcements.
II. Data configuration
Adding the service prefix
ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'*92#, CSTP=IN, CSA=LCO, MINL=4, MAXL=4,
CHSC=65535;
Configure a call prefix "*92#". Set the [SERVICE CATEGORY] parameter to
"intelligent service" and the [SERVICE ATTRIBUTE] parameter to "intra-office".
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-9
Adding an IN access code and DP data
ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'*92#, LEN=4;
ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, CSC=0, CODE=K'*92#, SKEY=500;
Add the access code of the prefix "*92#" and configure the TDP configuration data to
trigger the PPS. Set the [SERVICE KEY] parameter to "500" (standing for the ACM
service).
Adding resource capability
ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=500, MN=255;
"255" means that all modules have resource capabilities for the service.
Adding resource search data
ADD SRCSRH: MDU=1, SRC=BRD, STATE=USE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=2, MDU2=3,
MDU3=4, MDU4=5;
When a module has no resource, it can apply to other modules in the office for
resources after the configuration of the resource search data. It is recommended to
set the search mode to "Fixed search". For recommended search sequence for the
modules in an office, refer to the following table.
Table 3-1 Recommended search sequence for modules in an office
Module
No.
The 1st search
module
The 2nd search
module
The 3rd search
module
The 4th search
module
1 2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5 1
3 4 5 1 2
4 5 1 2 3
5 1 2 3 4

Note:
For the SM, set the inter-module communication rate to 512 kbit/s. For the SPM, set the inter-module
communication rate to 2 Mbit/s.

Adding language index
ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;
Configure the language index 1 to stand for English.
Setting software parameters
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-10
MOD SFP: ID=P127, VAL="0xefff";
The command means that the switch will support the card service of the ISP mode,
that is, PPS.
MOD SFP: ID=P56, VAL="fff7";
The switch will immediately back up the ACM dynamic data to the BAM after
refreshing.
MOD SFP: ID=P56, VAL="ffef";
The switch will refresh the ACM information unconditionally when overriding the
number restriction and number incomplete.
Adding the preselection access code
The ACM service uses the first three Preselection access code records by default.
Recording of voice files should be consistent with the data set here.
ADD PRECODE: IDX=0, ACD=K'001, CN="TELECOM";
ADD PRECODE: IDX=1, ACD=K'002, CN="ORIBITEL";
ADD PRECODE: IDX=2, ACD=K'003, CN="ETB";
"CN" stands for the name of a carrier.
Centrex subscriber using the ACM service
Centrex subscribers can also use the ACM service but the switch cannot record
Centrex extension numbers. The prefix "*92#" cannot be used within a Centrex group
because it is used to trigger the IN service. To use the ACM service, therefore,
Centrex subscribers need first dial the out-group prefix then the prefix "*92#", or
operators add the prefix "*92#" for a Centrex group. The following configuration is
only for reference.
1) Add an intra-group prefix "*92#"
ADD CXPFX: CXG=0, PFX=K'*92#, CSA=ALLSRVC, MINL=4, MAXL=4;
2) Add a number change record to insert the prefix "0"
ADD DNC: DCX=1, DCT=INS, ND=K'0;
3) Add a Centrex prefix special processing record to insert the out-group prefix
before the prefix "*92#" and the switch will reanalyze the number
ADD CXPFXPRO: CXG=0, PFX=K'*92#, CSC=0, DDC=YES, DDCX=1, RAF=YES;
Setting the maximum number of service subscribers
Carry out the MOD SMP command to set the maximum number of tuples of the ACM
service dynamic table. The maximum number of tuples of the table determines the
maximum number of subscribers who can successfully use the ACM service in one
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-11
module. Set the [PARAMETER] to "maximum number of ACM service subscribers".
The default value is 100.
After the modification of the maximum number of tuples, format the data and load it,
then the modification takes effect.
Backing up data
Carry out the BKP NSV command to back up the ACM service data in the active
MPU/SPC board to the BAM. After resetting or re-startup, the host will automatically
load the ACM service data from the BAM to the foreground. Set the
[SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE ID] parameter to "ACMS".
Setting the supplementary service fixed charging mode
ADD NSFIXCHG: NS=ACMU, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHGT=DETAIL;
Each time a subscriber uses the ACM service, the switch will generate a
supplementary service bill (detailed bill).
ADD NSFIXCHG: NS=ACMU, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHGT=PLSACC,
MID=METER1;
Use the meter 1 to count the times that a subscriber uses the ACM service.
III. Operations
To use the ACM service, a subscriber doesn't need to register it as long as he has the
service authority. New service subscribers use the default ACM data whose call
attribute is "National toll" and caller number is "99999999".
Suppose Subscriber B calls Subscriber A. Regardless of whether Subscriber A
answers the call, the switch will record the attribute and caller number of the call as
the ACM information of Subscriber A. If Subscriber B's number is restricted from
displaying or is incomplete, the switch will use the default data to refresh the ACM
information.
After Subscriber A dials a special service code (for example, "*92#"), the switch will
announce the number of Subscriber B. Then there are three possible cases.
If the call from Subscriber B is an intra-office call or a local call, Subscriber A will
hear an announcement like "To make a callback, please press 1". If Subscriber A
presses 1, the switch will call Subscriber B. If the call from Subscriber B is a
national or international long distance call, the switch will ask Subscriber A to
select a toll carrier. After Subscriber A selects one, the switch will call Subscriber
B through the selected carrier.
After the voice announcements, if Subscriber A dials a wrong number, the switch
will send an announcement like "The number you dialed is not correct, please
dial again". If Subscriber A dials a wrong number again, the switch will send the
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-12
announcement again. For the third time, the switch will send an announcement
like "Sorry, you have surpassed the maximum times for interaction. Thank you
for using, bye" and then send busy tone.
If Subscriber A dials no number after the prompt of selecting a carrier for five
seconds, the switch will send busy tone directly.
The cancellation of the ACM service authority of a subscriber will cause the switch to
delete the corresponding data in the ACM-service dynamic table. After the deletion,
the original data cannot be recovered. If you re-add the service authority for the
subscriber, all the service data of the subscriber will be initialized to the default data.
Therefore, take care when canceling the ACM service authority of a subscriber.
IV. Related commands
LST NSVUSER
You can carry out the LST NSVUSER command to list the total number of the ACM
service subscribers of an office and their detailed information.
DSP NSV
You can carry out the DSP NSV command to view the records in the backed-up ACM
dynamic table on the background. Set the [SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE ID]
parameter to "ACMS".

Note:
The ACM service is available only for the subscribers of a non-SSP end office. Only ST, DSL, and V5ST
subscribers can use this service.

V. Tunisian mode
The above mode is the Colombian mode.
In the Tunisian mode, suppose there is an ordinary subscriber A in the office A who
has activated the ACM service, and there is a subscriber B (belonging to the office A
or other office) who has called the subscriber A but received no answer. After dialing a
special supplementary service prefix, the subscriber A will be connected to the
subscriber who is the last one to call him but receive no answer (if there are multiple
subscribers who make calls to the subscriber A but receive no answer, the switch
connects the subscriber A only to the last time subscriber).
The differences between the Colombian mode and the Tunisian mode are as follows:
In the Tunisian mode, the switch records the caller number of a call only when
the service subscriber does not answer the call.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-13
In the Tunisian mode, the switch directly makes a callback and gives no prompt
after the service subscriber dials the ACM service number.
The Tunisian mode requires no configuration of the IN service data and related
voice files
Bit 5 of the Call Testing Parameter 4 (P56) controls whether the ACM service is of the
Colombian mode or of the Tunisian mode. By default, it is of the Colombian mode.
To use the ACM service in the Tunisian mode, configure the following data:
Modify Bit 5 of the software parameter P56 to "0".
MOD SFP: ID=P56, VAL="FFDF";
Add the prefix data and set the [SERVICE ATTRIBUTE] parameter to "Use
automatic call memory by DTMF".
ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'*92#, CSTP=NEW, CSA=DACMS, MINL=4, MAXL=4,
CHSC=65535;
3.5 Advice of Charge (AOCE)
I. Meaning
The registered subscriber initiates a call. After the conversation, the switch sends a
prompt ringing tone to the subscriber, meanwhile the bill information of this
conversation is displayed on the phone set.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "AOC" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service". If a
subscriber wants to use this service, he must select the phone set supporting the
service.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Ordinary subscriber
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *88#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
registration of the service
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-14
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Bs number
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hangs up
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone and the fee of this
conversation is displayed on As phone set.

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #88#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber B's number is 8883010, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *88#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883010
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-15
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hangs up
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone and the fee of this
conversation is displayed on As phone set.

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #88#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

Note:
This service is not applicable to the pulse telephone.
Bit 2 of the CCB internal parameter 4 determines whether registry is needed before using this
service. If it is set to 1, no registry is needed; if it is set to 0, registry is compulsory.
AOC service includes AOCS (Advice Of Charge at the Start of a call), AOCD (Advice Of Charge
during a call) and AOCE (Advice Of Charge at the End of a call). In which, AOCS and AOCD are
available to ISDN subscriber.

3.6 Assigned Pickup Call in Group
I. Meaning
To intercept the calls to a subscriber, you can dial the service code and the number of
the subscriber.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "assigned pickup call in group" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".
III. Operation
If Subscriber A uses the DTMF phone that is set to the assigned pickup. Subscriber B
is in the same assigned pickup group as Subscriber A in the office, whose number is
PQABCD. Subscriber C is a call-originating subscriber.
1) Service registration
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-16
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber
B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *11*PQABCD#
Subscriber B stop hearing the ringing tone, and
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
If Subscriber B's number is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883850
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber
B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *11*8883850#
Subscriber B stop hearing the ringing tone, and
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service requires that pickup party and service subscriber should be set in the same pickup group.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-17
3.7 Assigned Trunk Line Call
I. Meaning
Through this service, calls can be made on the designated trunk lines, Internal Digital
Trunk (IDT) lines and Local Optical Interface Board (OPT) lines.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is a test user (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Test user
MMM Module number
N Designated line type (value ranging between 0~2: 0-Trunk line, 1-IDT line,
2-OPT line)
TTTTT Circuit No.
PQRABCD Subscriber B's number
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*66*MMM*N*TTTTT#PQRABCD
The call is connected to Subscriber B through the
designated circuit
Subscriber B hears the ringing
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A or B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-18
IV. Example
Suppose test user A wants to originate a call to Subscriber B through trunk circuit 10
of module 1 and Bs number is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*66*001*0*00010#8883850
The call is connected to Subscriber B through the trunk
circuit 10 of module 1. Subscriber Bs phone rings.
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B.
A or B hooks up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service is for test user only. If the current area is Hong Kong, the operator can also use this
service.
The pulse phone set cannot use this service.
This service needs no registration or cancellation.

3.8 Authentication Service
I. Meaning
Authentication service mentioned here is only for authenticating incoming trunk caller
by means of number length authentication, call barring or caller attribute modification
in the unit of trunk group. Different authentication modes can be adopted based on
different caller categories, and different authentication modes can also be set for
different caller numbers and address attributes. This service is used in tandem office
to meet the requirement of large-capacity trunk authentication. In case of configuring
authentication data on Internet Service Process board (ISP), a maximum of 500,000
pieces of data can be configured.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-19
II. Setting conditions
In order to implement trunk authentication, the outgoing trunk side of the opposite
office is required to send caller number automatically. If the outgoing trunk does not
do so, the incoming trunk should be set to request outgoing trunk for the caller
number; otherwise, authentication cannot be done normally.
III. Operation
The operator uses ADD CLRDSG to set authentication modes for different callers,
and uses ADD TGDSG to specify the corresponding authentication group numbers
for various incoming caller categories.
IV. Example
Add caller authentication function for ISP:
ADD ISPFUNC: FCF=CLRDSP, BG=3;
Set to use incoming trunk group 10, and the length of caller number ranging from
7 to 10. The calls out of the length range will be rejected.
Step one: add a discrimination mode for a discrimination group number - number
length discrimination
ADD CLRDSG: DSP=10, CLI=K'654, DAI=UDN, FUNC=DSG, MIN=7, MAX=10;
Step two: set a discrimination group number for the trunk group
ADD TGDSG: TG=10, CCAT=254, DSG=10;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-20
Note:
The field "CALLER CATEGORY" in ADD TGDSG supports the wildcard character 254. When 254 is
entered, all caller categories will be matched.
The fields "REQUEST CALLER NUMBER" and "CAN REQUEST CALLER NUMBER" must be set to
"TRUE" first before setting of discrimination group number for trunk group by using ADD TGDSG, so
as to further ensure that the opposite office will send the caller number; otherwise, caller
authentication cannot be carried out.
Due to the limit of table capacity of the host program and data setting mode, wildcard character field
will not be supported if discrimination data ADD CLRDSG is not set on ISP, while if the data is set on
ISP, both discrimination group number and caller number support wildcard character field.
Discrimination group number supports wildcard character discrimination group 65534, and caller
number supports 16-e wildcard character (eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee).
The function codes of the discrimination group are described as follows:
a) REJECT CALL: reject incoming calls directly.
b) CALLER NUMBER DISCRIMINATION: number length discrimination; restrict the length of caller
number of the opposite office. If the caller number length exceeds the specified range, the call will be
rejected.
c) Modify caller attribute: modify some attributes of the caller without affecting incoming calls. The caller
attributes that can be modified are: call source code, billing source code, subscriber call barring group
number, caller category and caller number change of the incoming trunk implemented through caller
number change index.
d) Caller number discrimination and modify caller attribute: b) combination with c).

3.9 Black and White Lists
I. Meaning
Black and white list is subject to call barring service, that is, caller and callee are set
with a group number identifier respectively (call barring group number), to allow or
prohibit a call by configuring the call barring relations between calling group number
and called group number. Caller and callee mentioned here not only limit to phone
subscribers, but include various trunk subscribers. Therefore, different call barring
group numbers can be specified for different subscribers in Common/ISDN phone set
or trunk group.
II. Setting conditions
Null.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-21
III. Operation
The commands related to call barring group number are as follows:
ADD/MOD ST, ADD /MOD DSL, ADD /MOD V5ST and ADD /MOD V5DSL:
setting/modifying call barring group numbers of subscribers of various phone
sets;
ADD /MOD N7TG and ADD /MOD N1TG: setting/modifying the default call
barring group numbers of subscribers of CSS7 or Channel Associated Signaling
(CAS) trunk;
ADD /MOD CLRDSG: modifying call barring group numbers according to
different calling numbers of the incoming trunk group through caller
authentication, so as to specify different call barring group numbers for different
calling numbers and for the incoming trunk to implement call barring by black
and white lists based on calling numbers. However, a precondition must be
provided that the outgoing trunk of the opposite office should send calling
numbers.
Among the above commands, only CALL BARRING GROUP is relevant to call
barring group numbers.
ADD CLDGRP: setting called restriction group number. Called number can be
only the prefix of a number or a complete number, and the system identifies
called number field by the maximum match. For example, if two called numbers
654 and 6540001 are in a table, when a subscriber dials 6540001, the called
number 6540001 will be matched instead of 654.
SET GAC: setting whether call barring is allowed between groups.
IV. Example
Suppose there is a calling number 6540001 and a called number 7770001, and it
is required to set call barring that 6540001 can't call 7770001 through the black
and white lists function, the following data should be set:
MOD ST: D=K'6540001, LMTGRP=1;
ADD CLDGRP: CLD=K'7770001, GRPT=OG, GRP=2;
SET GAC: SRG=1, DRG=2, CI=CDIS;
Suppose there is an incoming trunk group 10 and a called number 77700001,
and it is required that a non-local subscriber calls the callee from the trunk group
10:
MOD N7TG: TG=10, LMTGRP=1; (CCS7 trunk group)
(MOD N1TG: TG=10, LMTGRP=1;) (CAS trunk group)
ADD CLDGRP: CLD=K'7770001, GRPT=OG, GRP=2;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-22
SET GAC: SRG=1, DRG=2, CI=CDIS;

Note:
The call barring group numbers range from 0 to 65535, and several special group numbers are
described as follows:
65535 --- indicating void call barring group number, that is, subscriber is not subject to any call barring
group number;
60001 --- black list call barring group number. The subscribers subject to black list can only call
subscribers in white list;
60002 --- white list call barring group number. The subscribers subject to white list can call the
subscribers of all other call barring group numbers;
65534 --- call barring group number wildcard character. Note not to set call barring group number as
wildcard character for subscribers, however, wildcard character 65534 can be specified as the call
barring group number during setting of inter-group call barring table by SET GAC.
Before specifying call barring group number for a subscriber, you should use SET GAC to finish the
settings for newly-added group numbers and other numbers.
Be careful in using the wildcard character: if unnecessary, it is better not to use wildcard character to
set data restriction in command SET GAC, otherwise, it may lead to the failure of most calls.

3.10 Block the Blocker
This service is a terminating feature. It enables a subscriber to reject incoming calls
carried no Calling Line Identification (CLI) information or the CLI information is not
allowed to be displayed to the subscriber.
The rejected calls will be routed to a denial announcement or a pre-defined tone will
be returned to the caller for advising that the callee does not wish to receive
anonymous call.
When this feature is activated in the subscribers line, normal call termination process
will be provided to those incoming calls meeting with the following conditions.
Calls carry CLI information and presentation of the CLI information is allowed;
International call;
Calls with NI = 1.
If the calls do not meet the conditions, they will be routed to an announcement or a
pre-defined tone will be returned to the callers.
Law Analog Subscriber Line Board (DEL) subscribers, Centrex subscribers,
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Basic Rate Access (BRA) subscribers and
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-23
pilot or auxiliary subscribers of any hunting group can activate/deactivate this feature
by pressing the access code *76 / #76.
For B number of Duplex Ringing subscriber, the activation and deactivation codes
are *#*76 / *##76.
3.11 Booking Call
I. Meaning
This service enables the subscriber to automatically originate calls to the called
number assigned beforehand when the pre-set time arrives.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "booking call" authority (you can use the command ADD ST
or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber with the "booking call" authority
HH Hours set by the subscriber (00~23)
MM Minutes set by the subscriber (00~59)
PQABCD Called number
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *67*HHMM*PQABCD# (on
DTMF phone) or 167HHMMPQABCD (on Pulse
phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone
of successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
When the pre-set time arrives, the switch will first of all send the ringing tone to
Subscriber A. When Subscriber A hooks off, the switch will automatically originate a
call to the registered called number. If the callee is idle, Subscriber A will hear the ring
back tone. When the callee hooks off, both parties begin to talk. At this time, the
registered service will be automatically cancelled. In other case, if the callee is busy,
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-24
Subscriber A will hear the busy tone, and after 2 minutes, the switch will ring
Subscriber A again. If the switch fails to establish the call after five attempts, the
registered service will be automatically cancelled.
If Subscriber A does not hook off when the telephone rings, the ringing tone will stop
after 25 seconds. Two minutes later, the switch will ring Subscriber A again.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #67# (on DTMF phone) or
151167 (Pulsed phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone
of successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example
Subscriber A whose number is 8883080 with the "booking call" service authority
HH = 10
MM = 20
Subscriber B whose number is 8883010
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *67*1020*8883010# (on
DTMF phone) or 16710208883010
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone
of successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
At 10:20 after successful registration, the switch will first of all send the ringing tone to
Subscriber A. When Subscriber A hooks off, the switch will automatically originate a
call to Subscriber B (whose number is 8883010). If the callee is idle, Subscriber A will
hear the ring back tone. When the callee hooks off, both parties begin to talk. At this
time, the registered service will be automatically cancelled. In other case, if the callee
is busy, Subscriber A will hear the busy tone. After 2 minutes, the switch will ring
Subscriber A again. If the switch fails to establish the call after five attempts, the
registered service will be automatically cancelled.
If Subscriber A does not hook off when the telephone rings, the ringing tone will stop
after 25 seconds. Two minutes later, the switch will ring Subscriber A again.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-25
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #67# (on DTMF phone) or
151167 (Pulsed phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

Note:
If the subscriber originates and successfully establishes another call before the pre-set time, the
booked call will be automatically cancelled.
The called numbers of the booking calls can be either national or international numbers.

3.12 Call Back On Busy
I. Meaning
This feature allows the callee to call back the caller. Once the callee turns from the
busy state to the idle state, the caller will hear a special ringing tone.
The call back service shall automatically be cancled when the callee is busy for 20
minutes after automatic call back service is activated. Manual removal of the
activation is allowed.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "call back on busy" authority (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Callee
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-26
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A calls Subscriber B Subscriber A hears the busy tone
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *59#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Local-office:
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hangs up Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

Out-office:
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hangs up
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone and Subscriber B hears the ringing
tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #59#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the successful
service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example
Suppose the number of Subscriber B is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-27
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850 Subscriber A hears the busy tone
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *59#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the successful
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Local-office:
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hangs up Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

Out-office:
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hangs up
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #59#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-28
Note:
After the "call back on busy" service is activated, if there is a call back and Subscriber A does not
answer it within one minute (the system will stop ringing after one minute) or the call back is
unsuccessful after 20 minutes of successful registration, the registration will be automatically
canceled.
If a subscriber is not a local subscriber, internal call parameter 2 is used to set this service: BIT 11:
whether to allow local call back
=1: not allowed;
=0: allowed.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and call back on busy
service.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call forwarding services and call back on busy
service.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for do-not-disturb service and call back on busy service.
Each subscriber can register only one subscriber for the call back service.
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.13 Call Forward of Hunting Group Service
Call Forward Unconditional of a Hunting group (CFUH) is a terminating feature. When
this feature is activated, all incoming calls to the pilot number of the hunting group will
immediately be transferred to another telephone pre-defined by the subscriber.
Call Forward Busy of a Hunting group (CFBH) is a terminating feature. When this
feature is activated, all incoming calls to the pilot number of the hunting group will be
forwarded to another telephone pre-defined by the subscriber if all lines within that
hunting group are busy.
This service is only for PBX indicating subscriber and the national code must be Hong
Kong.
These features are applicable to all hunting features including the Sequential Hunting
and Circular Hunting.
The subscriber can activate/deactivate the CFUH feature of a hunting group by
dialing the access code *55/#55 at the pilot telephone.
The subscriber can activate/deactivate the CFBH feature of a hunting group by dialing
the access code *57/#57 at the pilot telephone.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-29
3.14 Call Forwarding Busy (CFB)
I. Meaning
If a subscriber registers the "CFB" service, all the incoming calls to the subscriber will
be forwarded to another designated number when the subscriber is busy.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CFB" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Forward-to subscriber
C, D Callers
PQABCD Subscriber Bs number
Subscriber B must be a local office subscriber, otherwise, he/she will hear the busy
tone when using the service.
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *40*PQABCD# (on DTMF
phone) or 140PQABCD (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
After the service is registered, all the calls to Subscriber A will be forwarded to
Subscriber B when Subscriber A is busy.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #40# (on DTMF phone) or
151140 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-30

IV. Example
If Subscriber Bs number is 8883850 and Subscriber As number is 8883851, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *40*8883850# (on
DTMF phone) or 1408883850 (on Pulse
phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Subscriber D dials 8883851
Subscriber D hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber A hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber D
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883851
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber Bs phone
rings
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #40# (on DTMF phone)
or 151140 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-31
Note:
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and call forwarding busy.
When the call forwarding busy and do-not-disturb services are registered, the do-not-disturb service
will take precedence.
When the call forwarding busy service is registered, you will not have the call waiting function.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and call forwarding busy.
The call forwarding unconditional service takes precedence over the call forwarding busy service.
When Subscriber A calls Subscriber B and the call is forwarded to Subscriber C, if Subscriber C
applies for tracing malicious call, he/she will get the number of Subscriber A.
When Subscriber C calls Subscriber A and A forwards the call to Subscriber B on busy, if both
Subscribers A and B have applied for the calling line identification presentation service, only
Subscriber B can identify the caller number of Subscriber C.

3.15 Call Forwarding No Reply (CFNR)
I. Meaning
After the registration of this service, all the incoming calls to the subscriber will be
forwarded to a designated number if no reply is received within a specified time limit.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CFNR" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Forward-to subscriber
C Caller
PQABCD Subscriber Bs number
Subscriber B must be a local office subscriber, otherwise, he/she will hear the busy
tone when using the service.
1) Service registration
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-32
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *41*PQABCD# (on
DTMF phone) or 141PQABCD (on Pulse
phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of
Subscriber A
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber
A hears the ringing tone
No reply from Subscriber A, 20 seconds
later
Subscriber Bs phone rings
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #41# (on DTMF phone)
or 151141 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
If Subscriber Bs number is 8883850 and Subscriber As number is 8883851, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *41*8883850# (on
DTMF phone) or 1418883850 (on Pulse
phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-33
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883851
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
No reply from Subscriber A, 20 seconds later Subscriber Bs phone rings
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #41# (on DTMF phone)
or 151141 (Pulsed phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and call forwarding no
reply.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy and call forwarding no reply.
When the call forwarding no reply and do-not-disturb services are registered, the do-not-disturb
service takes precedence.
When the call forwarding no reply service is registed, the subscriber will not have the call waiting
function.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and call forwarding no reply.
The call forwarding unconditional takes precedence over call forwarding no reply.
When Subscriber A calls Subscriber B and the call is forwarded to Subscriber C, if Subscriber C
applies for tracing malicious call, he/she will get the number of Subscriber A.
When Subscriber C calls Subscriber A and A forwards the call to Subscriber B on no reply, if both
Subscribers A and B have applied for the calling line identification presentation service, both
Subscribers A and B can identify the caller number of Subscriber C.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-34
3.16 Call Forwarding Restriction
I. Meaning
This service is for operator only. It can restrict subscribers from the designated call
source to register or use CF service. For the subscribers who want to register CF on
phone set, they will be prohibited for registering forward-to numbers; for the
subscribers having registered with CF, they cannot use CF service. This service is
applicable to CFU, CFB and CFNR.
II. Setting conditions
Null.
III. Operation
The operator uses command ADD CFR to add CF restriction data.
IV. Example
Suppose the operator wants to restrict the subscribers from call source 0 for
forwarding calls to the numbers started with 654, he/she should use the command:
ADD CFR: CSC=0, RT=CFU, RN=K'654;
When a subscriber from call source 0 registers a forward-to number started with 654
for CFU, he/she will hear the busy tone, and the registration of CF fails. If a
subscriber from call source 0 has registered CF to a number started with 654, CF
cannot be used when there is an incoming call.

Note:
If a Centrex subscriber registers a short number for CF, the long number corresponding to this short
number will be restricted for CF; if this subscriber registers an out-group number for CF, this number
without outgoing prefix will be restricted for CF.
All the numbers started with this restricted called number will be restricted. Note that this number can
be a prefix or not.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-35
3.17 Call Forwarding to Voice Mailbox
I. Meaning
When a callee cannot be connected due to ongoing conversation (busy) or absence
(no reply), the incoming calls can be transferred to the voice mailbox of the subscriber
for recording short messages. The callee can hear these messages by connecting his
mailbox.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the authority of "CF to voice mailbox" (including CFB to voice
mailbox, CFNR to voice mailbox and CFU to voice mailbox), and you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it.
The corresponding voice mailbox numbers have been set in the local information
table. Different numbers can be set to the mailboxes for CFB, CFNR and CFU (You
can use the command SET OFI to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
The mailbox number for CFB to voice mailbox has been set at the local office.
A Service subscriber with the authority of CFB to voice mailbox
B, C Ordinary subscribers
Subscribers A and B are talking now (A is in busy state)
Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C calls Subscriber A
Subscriber C starts to leave the voice message after hearing the
prompt
Subscriber C hangs up Message leaving ends

The mailbox number for CFNR to voice mailbox has been set at the local office.
A Service subscriber with the authority of CFNR to voice mailbox
B Ordinary subscriber
Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-36
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber B hears
the ring back tone
Subscriber A does not answer the
phone
The call is forwarded to the voice mailbox, and Subscriber B
starts to leave the message after hearing the prompt

The mailbox number for CFU to voice mailbox has been set at the local office.
A Service subscriber with the authority of CFU to voice mailbox
B Ordinary subscriber
Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A
The call is forwarded to the voice mailbox, and Subscriber B
starts to leave the message after hearing the prompt

IV. Example
The mailbox number for CFB to voice mailbox set at the local office is 6540001, the
number for CFNR to voice mailbox is 6540002, and the number for CFU to voice
mailbox is 6540003:
SET OFI: BTVM=K'6540001, NTVM=K'6540002, UTVM=K6540003;
Subscriber A (7770000) has the authority of CFB to voice mailbox:
MOD ST: D=K'7770000, NS=CFBAVM-1;
Subscriber B (7770001) has the authority of CFNR to voice mailbox:
MOD ST: D=K'7770001, NS=CFNRAVM-1;
Subscriber C (7770002) has the authority of CFU to voice mailbox:
MOD ST: D=K'7770002, NS=UNTB-1;
Ordinary Subscriber D (7770003) and E (7770004)
CFB to voice mailbox
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A calls Subscriber D Subscribers A and D talk with each other
Subscriber E calls Subscriber A
Subscriber E starts to leave the voice message after hearing
the prompt

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-37
CFNR to voice mailbox
Operation Expected result
Subscriber D calls Subscriber B
Subscriber D hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B does not answer the call
Subscriber B stops ringing, and Subscriber D starts to
leave the voice message after hearing the prompt

CFU to voice mailbox
Operation Expected result
Subscriber D calls Subscriber C
Subscriber D starts to leave the voice message after
hearing the prompt

Note:
CFU to voice mailbox enjoys the highest priority among three CF services, that is, when a subscriber
registers both CFU to voice mailbox and CFNR to voice mailbox or CFB to voice mailbox at the
same time, all the incoming calls will be directly transferred to the voice mailbox (CFU to mailbox).
When a subscriber registers both CFU service and CFU to voice mailbox service, CFU enjoys the
higher priority.
When a subscriber registers both CFB service and CFB to voice mailbox service, CFB enjoys the
higher priority.
When a subscriber registers both CFNR service and CFNR to voice mailbox service, CFNR enjoys
the higher priority.

3.18 Call Forwarding Unconditional (CFU)
I. Meaning
A subscriber can forward the incoming calls to another number. With this service, all
the incoming calls to the subscriber, no matter what state the subscriber is, will be
automatically forwarded to a designated number.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CFU" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-38
A Service subscriber
B Forward-to subscriber
C Caller
PQABCD Subscriber Bs number (designated by Subscriber A, to which the calls are
forwarded).
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *57*PQABCD# (on DTMF
phone) or 157PQABCD (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials Subscriber As
number
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber Bs
phone rings
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #57# (on DTMF
phone) or 151157 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
If the telephone number of Subscriber B is 8883850 and Subscriber As number is
8883851, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-39
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A dials *57*8883850# (on
DTMF phone) or 1578883850 (on
Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883851
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber Bs
phone rings
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #57# (on DTMF
phone) or 151157 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and call forwarding
unconditional.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy and call forwarding unconditional.
When the call forwarding service and do-not-disturb service are registered, the do-not-disturb service
takes precedence.
When the call forwarding unconditional is registered, the subscriber will lose the call waiting function.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and call forwarding unconditional.
The call forwarding unconditional takes precedence over the call forwarding busy.
The call forwarding unconditional takes precedence over the call forwarding no reply.
When Subscriber A calls Subscriber B and the call is forwarded to Subscriber C, if Subscriber C
applies for tracing malicious call, he/she will get the number of Subscriber A.
When Subscriber C calls Subscriber A and A forwards the call unconditionally to Subscriber B, if
both Subscribers A and B have applied for the calling line identification presentation service, only
Subscriber B can identify the caller number of Subscriber C.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-40
3.19 Call Transfer (CT)
I. Meaning
The caller forward by hooking means that when a subscriber, as caller, is in
conversation, he/she can call a third party by pressing the hook. The original callee is
on hold when the third partys phone rings. The caller may hang up at this time, while
the original callee hears ring back tone. The third party keeps on ringing, and can talk
with the original callee directly after off-hook. The caller is also permitted to hang up
after the conversation with the third party is over, then the third party and the original
callee begin to talk directly.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the CT authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST
to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Ordinary subscriber
C Ordinary subscriber
1) Service registration
This service need not be registered.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber B hears the music and holds on
Subscriber A dials the number of
Subscriber C
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

3) Service cancellation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-41
This service need not be canceled.
IV. Example
A Service subscriber with CT authority
B Ordinary subscriber, whose number is 8883020
C Ordinary subscriber, whose number is 8883030
1) Service registration
This service need not be registered.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883020
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber
B hears the music and holds on
Subscriber A dials 8883030
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

3) Service cancellation
This service need not be canceled.

Note:
This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone set.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-42
3.20 Call Waiting (CW)
I. Meaning
When Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber B and Subscriber C tries to establish
connection with Subscriber A, Subscriber A will be given a prompt of call waiting,
indicating that another subscriber is waiting for talking with him/her.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CW" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B, C Callers
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *58# (on DTMF
phone) or 158 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber As number
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber
A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of
Subscriber A
Subscriber C hears the waiting prompt tone, and
Subscriber A hears the call waiting tone when taling
with Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber B hears the music, Subscriber C hears the
ring back tone, and Subscriber A hears the special
dialing tone
If Subscriber A dials 2
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber B
hears the music
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-43
Operation Expected result
If Subscriber A dials 1
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber B
hears the busy tone
Then, Subscriber A presses the hook
The current talking party is held, and Subscribers B and
C hear the music
If Subscriber A dials 2
Talking with another party, and the party held hears the
music
If Subscriber A dials 1
Talking with another party, and the party held hears the
busy tone
If Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers B and C hear the busy tone
If the party talking with Subscriber A
hangs up
Subscriber A talks with another party
If the held party hangs up The talking will not be affected

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #58# (on DTMF
phone) or 151158
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
If Subscriber As number is 8883850, then the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *58# (on DTMF
phone) or 158 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials 8883850
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber
A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-44
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883850
Subscriber C hears the waiting prompt tone, and
Subscriber A hears the call waiting tone when taling
with Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber B hears the music, Subscriber C hears the
ring back tone, and Subscriber A hears the special
dialing tone
If Subscriber A dials 2
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber B
hears the music
If Subscriber A dials 1
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber B
hears the busy tone
Then, Subscriber A presses the hook
The current talking party is held, and Subscribers B and
C hear the music
If Subscriber A dials 2
Talking with another party, and the party held hears the
music
If Subscriber A dials 1
Talking with another party, and the party held hears the
busy tone
If Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers B and C hear the busy tone
If the party talking with Subscriber A
hangs up
Subscriber A then talks with another party
If another held party hangs up The talking will not be affected

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #58# (on DTMF
phone) or 151158
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
If Subscriber A ignores the call made by Subscriber C, 20 seconds later, the system will
automatically cancel the call waiting tone to Subscriber A.
When the call forwarding services (including call forwarding unconditional, call forwarding no reply
and call forwarding busy) are registered, you will not have the call waiting function.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-45
3.21 Call Watch Service
I. Meaning
If "call watch" attribute of a subscriber is set to TRUE, the switch will automatically
send alarm information for Observe Call to the alarm console when the subscriber
makes a call. The message displays the subscriber's state.
II. Setting conditions
The administrator modifies subscriber attribute CALL WATCH FLAG to "YES" by
command MOD ST.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
MOD ST: D=K'A, CWF=YES Operation succeeded
Run "C&C08 Switch Alarm"
Subscriber A carries out the operation Alarm information displays the subscriber's state

2) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
MOD ST: D=K'A, CWF=NO Operation succeeded
Run "C&C08 Switch Alarm"
Subscriber A carries out the operation
No "Observe Call" alarm information for displaying the
subscriber's state

IV. Example
Suppose the number of Subscriber A is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
MOD ST: D=K'8883850, CWF=YES Operation succeeded
Run "C&C08 Switch Alarm"
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-46
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A carries out the operation Alarm information displays the subscriber's state

2) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
MOD ST: D=K'8883850, CWF=NO Operation succeeded
Run "C&C08 Switch Alarm"
Subscriber A carries out the operation
No "Observe Call" alarm information for displaying the
subscriber's state

3.22 Caller Forward by Hooking
I. Meaning
When a subscriber, as caller, is in conversation, he/she can call a third party by
pressing the hook. The original callee holds on when the third partys phone rings.
The caller hangs up at this time, and the original callee hears ring back tone. After the
third party picks up the phone, he/she can talk with the original callee directly.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "caller forward by hooking" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber with the "caller forward by hooking" authority
B Ordinary subscriber
C Ordinary subscriber
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber
B
Subscriber Bs phone rings, and Subscriber A hears
the ring back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-47
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber B hears the music and holds on
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber
C
Subscriber Cs phone rings, and Subscriber A hears
the ring back tone
Subscriber A hangs up
Subscriber Cs phone rings, and Subscriber B hears
the ring back tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
A Service subscriber with the "caller forward by hooking" authority
B Ordinary subscriber, whose number is 8883020
C Ordinary subscriber, whose number is 8883030
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883020
Subscriber Bs phone rings, and Subscriber A hears the ring back
tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the
hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber B hears
the music and holds on
Subscriber A dials 8883030
Subscriber Cs phone rings, and Subscriber A hears the ring back
tone
Subscriber A hangs up
Subscriber Cs phone rings, and Subscriber B hears the ring back
tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-48
3.23 Caller Name Display
I. Definition
This specification defines the interworking requirements of the network-to-network
connection for supporting this service in the NP system. An optional parameter
"Generic Name", embedded in the Initial Address Message (IAM) over the Common
Channel Signaling No.7 (CCS7) as stipulated in the ISUP specification, is adopted for
sending the caller name across the network interface. The format of the "Generic
Name" parameter is defined in this specification.
This service enables the delivery of the caller's name to the callee for him/her to
identify the caller. For interworking of this service across the networks that support
this service in Hong Kong, the caller name shall be contained in the optional
parameter "Generic Name", based on American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
T1.641-1995 and embedded in the IAM, which is sent from the originating network to
the terminating network. Query from the terminating network to the originating
network is not supported
II. Description
This feature is provided for:
Individual Line
Multiline Hunt Group
Pilot Line
Non-Pilot Line

Note:
It is optional for network operators to support original callee name and redirecting name.
"Availability" field should be set as "name available" if this service information is presented.
"Blocking toggle" setting in "Presentation" field is not supported.
A special phone set (CID-II) is need in this service.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-49
3.24 Calling Line Identification During Call Waiting (CID
during CW)
I. Meaning
With this service registered, if there is an incoming call when a subscriber is in
conversation, he/she will hear the CW prompt tone and see the number of the
incoming call on the phone set.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CLIP", CID during CW and "CW" authorities (you can use
the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber with "CLIP", "CID during CW" and "CW" authorities and
using a CID phone set
B, C Callers
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *58# (on DTMF
phone) or 158 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber As number
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber
A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of
Subscriber A
Subscriber C hears the waiting tone
Subscriber A hears Subscriber B and call waiting tone
Subscriber Cs number is displayed on Subscriber A's
phone set
The rest procedures are the same as call waiting service.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-50
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #58# (on DTMF
phone) or 151158
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example
If Subscriber A uses a CLIP telephone set with the number of 8883850, the operation
process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *58# (on DTMF
phone) or 158 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials 8883850
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber A hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883850
Subscriber C hears the waiting tone
Subscriber A hears Subscriber B and call waiting tone Subscriber
Cs number is displayed on Subscriber A's phone set
The rest procedures are the same as call waiting service.

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #58# (on DTMF
phone) or 151158
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-51
Note:
Bit 15 of the CCB testing parameter 2 controls whether the host software is to process number as A, D,
E, F. By default, it is set to 0 when the CID during CW is applied.

3.25 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)
I. Meaning
With this function registered, the callee will have the caller number displayed on
his/her CID phone set.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CLIP" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Ordinary subscriber
B Callee with the CLIP authority and using a CID phone set
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the
telephone number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and the number of Subscriber
A is displayed on the phone set
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber B uses a CID phone set with the number of 8883850, the
operation process is as follows:
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-52
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and the number of Subscriber
A is displayed on the phone set
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
For the following circumstances, the caller number will not be displayed.
a) The flag of permanent CLIR service of the caller is set to true.
b) The caller applies temporary booking of CLIR service.
c) The caller registers CLIR or permanent CLIR service.

3.26 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
I. Meaning
With this function, the number of the caller will not be displayed on the phone set of
the callee, even if the callee has registered Calling Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP) service.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CLIR" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-53
B Called subscriber registered with CLIP service
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *61#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the
telephone number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and the telephone set displays
"PRIVATE"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #61#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
If Subscriber B uses a CID phone set with the number of 8883850, the operation
process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *61#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-54
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
8883850
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and the telephone set displays
"PRIVATE"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang
up
Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #61#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
After the registration of CLIR, the caller number can also be displayed by use of the temporary
reservation of CLIP.
After the registration of CLIR, the caller number can still be displayed if the callee enjoys the CLIR
override authority.
Bit 15 of the Central Control Base (CCB) testing parameter 1 decides whether the CLIR registration
is needed. If bit 15 is 0, it is unnecessary to register the CLIR service and the subscriber with the
CLIR authority can directly enjoy it. If bit 15 is 1 (default value), the registration is needed.

3.27 Calling Name Per Call Blocking Service
This originating feature is applicable to the lines with Caller Name Display service
assigned but without Calling Name Per Line Blocking service assigned. All calls
prefixed with "133" will block the callee's CPE from receiving the caller's name from
the terminating office. All calls originated from the lines with this feature activated
should be classified as 'P', that is, "private".
This service is activated by the subscriber's off-hook, thereby receiving the dialing
tone, and dialing the access code "133". If the activation is successful, the subscriber
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-55
will receive the recall dialing tone. The subscriber then dials his/her desired telephone
number.

Note:
A special phone set (CID-II) is need in this service.

3.28 Calling Name Per Call Unblocking Service
This originating feature is applicable to the lines with both Caller Name Display
service and Calling Name Per Line Blocking service assigned. All calls prefixed with
"1357" will enable the callee's CPE to display the caller's name.
This service is activated by the subscriber's off-hook, thereby receiving the dialing
tone, and dialing the access code "1357". If the activation is successful, the
subscriber will receive the recall dialing tone. The subscriber then dials his/her
desired telephone number.

Note:
A special phone set (CID-II) is need in this service.

3.29 Calling Name Per Line Blocking Service
This originating feature is applicable to the lines with Caller Name Display service
assigned. The callee's Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) will be blocked from
displaying the caller's name. All calls originated from the lines assigned with this
feature should be classified as 'P', that is, "private".

Note:
This service is registered through Graphic User Interface (GUI) or Man Machine Language (MML),
and is not customer controllable.
A special phone set (CID-II) is need in this service.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-56
3.30 Cancel All Registered Services
I. Meaning
With this service, the subscriber can cancel all the registered services.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is an ordinary subscriber and the service has been registered in the
"service attribute" of command ADD CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Ordinary subscriber, whose password is SSSS
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #44*SSSS# (on
DTMF phone) or 144SSSS (on
Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
After registering this supplementary service, all other supplementary services
registered by the subscriber will be canceled.
3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber A's password is 1234, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #44*1234# (on DTMF
phone) or 1441234 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-57
2) Service operation
After registering this supplementary service, all other supplementary services
registered by the subscriber will be canceled.
3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
3.31 Cancel Call Waiting
Cancel Call Waiting (CCW) is an addition to the Call Waiting (CW) feature and
provides the CW subscriber with the ability to disable the CW feature for the duration
of a phone call. CCW is activated (that is, CW is disabled) by dialing a special code
prior to placing or during a call, and is automatically deactivated when the subscriber
disconnects from the call.
A CW subscriber can disable the CW feature for the duration of a call originated at the
subscribers line. The subscriber goes off-hook, receives dialing tone, and dials the
CCW access code (#07). After the access code is dialed, the subscriber receives
recall dialing tone. The subscriber then dials the desired telephone number. CW is
disabled for the duration of the call and automatically restored to the line on
disconnection by the subscriber.
A second CCW procedure, applicable to any established call regardless of whether
the call originated or terminated at the subscribers line which had subscribed CW
feature. After a stable talking state has been established, the subscriber can disable
CW by hooking. On recognition of the flash signal, the switching system places the
other party (parties) on hold and returns recall dialing tone to the CW subscriber. The
subscriber then dials the CCW access code. On receiving the access code, the
switching system returns confirmation tone to inform the subscriber that his/her
request to disable the CW feature has been honoured. After returning confirmation
tone, the switching system automatically re-establishes the original connection
between the subscriber and the other party (parties). CW is disabled for the duration
of the call and automatically restored when the subscriber disconnects.
3.32 CLIR Override
I. Meaning
With this service registered, the callee can override the CLIR set by the caller to
display the caller number.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-58
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the authority of "CLIR override" (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Caller with the authority of CLIR
B Callee with the authority of CLIP and CLIR override
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Bs
number
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber As number is displayed on the phone set of Subscriber B
even though A has CLIR authority
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang
up
Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber As number is 8883850 and Subscriber Bs number is 8883851,
the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883851
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber As number 8883850 is displayed on Subscriber Bs
phone set even though A has CLIR authority
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-59
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
CLIR is to be used in coordination with CLIP.

3.33 Conference Calling (CONF)
I. Meaning
This service is used for the communication among three or more parties.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CONF" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of
command ADD CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B, C Callees
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the telephone
number of Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-60
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber B hears the conference convening tone
Subscriber A dials the number of
Subscriber C
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscribers A, B and C talk with each other
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A dials a number
The other subscribers listen to the conening tone of
telephone conference
If Subscriber A presses the hook after
dialing failure
Subscriber A resumes to talk with all the attendants after
hearing the busy tone
3 seconds after Subscriber A's dialing
failure
Subscriber A automatically returns to the telephone
conference
If no reply is heard after Subscriber A
dials a number successfully
Subscriber A presses the hook to return to the telephone
conference
If Subscriber A presses the hook after
dialing a number successfully
Subscriber A returns to the telephone conference
If Subscriber A dials a number
successfully and the called party
hooks off
The new subscriber join in the telephone conference

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
If Subscriber B's number is 8883850 and Subscriber C's number is 8883851, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber B hears the conference convening tone
Subscriber A dials 8883851
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C
hears the ringing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-61
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscribers A, B and C talk with each other
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A dials a number
The other subscribers listen to the conening tone of
telephone conference
If Subscriber A presses the hook after
dialing failure
Subscriber A resumes to talk with all the attendants after
hearing the busy tone
3 seconds after Subscriber A's dialing
failure
Subscriber A automatically returns to the telephone
conference
If no reply is heard after Subscriber A
dials a number successfully
Subscriber A presses the hook to return to the telephone
conference
If Subscriber A presses the hook after
dialing a number successfully
Subscriber A returns to the telephone conference
If Subscriber A dials a number
successfully and the called party hooks
off
The new subscriber join in the telephone conference

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
This service takes precedence over the three-party service.
Each subscriber can register four groups of conference calls, but can only start one of them, and the
maximum number of members in each group is 6.

3.34 Conference Incoming Call
I. Meaning
With this service registered, the convener will have the right to receive or reject the
incoming calls while the telephone conference is being held.
II. Setting conditions
The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-62
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber with the "conference incoming call" authority
B Ordinary subscriber
C Ordinary subscriber
D Ordinary subscriber
E Ordinary subscriber
The telephone conference, which was convened by Subscriber A and participated by
Subscribers B and C, is being held.
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Subscriber D dials Subscriber A's
number
Subscriber A listens to music, and Subscribers B, C and D
hear the prompt tone of the telephone conference
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *85# Subscribers A, B, C and D begin to talk with each other
Subscriber E hooks off Subscriber E hears the dialing tone
Subscriber E dials Subscriber A's
number
Subscriber A listens to music, and Subscribers B, C, D and
E hear the prompt tone of the telephone conference
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #85#
Subscriber E hears the busy tone, and Subscribers A, B, C
and D continue to talk

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
A Service subscriber with the "conference incoming call" authority, whose number
is 8883010
B Ordinary subscriber
C Ordinary subscriber
D Ordinary subscriber
E Ordinary subscriber
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-63
The telephone conference, which was convened by Subscriber A and participated by
Subscribers B and C, is being held.
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Subscriber D dials 8883010
Subscriber A listens to music, and Subscribers B, C and D hear the
prompt tone of the telephone conference
Subscriber A presses the
hook
Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *85# Subscribers A, B, C and D begin to talk with each other
Subscriber E hooks off Subscriber E hears the dialing tone
Subscriber E dials 8883010
Subscriber A listens to music, and Subscribers B, C, D and E hear
the prompt tone of the telephone conference
Subscriber A presses the
hook
Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #85#
Subscriber E hears the busy tone, and Subscribers A, B, C and D
continue to talk

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
3.35 Delay Hot Line Service
I. Meaning
With the hot line service registered, if a subscriber does not dial any number within 5
seconds after hooking off, the telephone set will be automatically connected to a
previously specified callee. If there is no registration of the hot line service, the caller
will still hear the dialing tone after 5 seconds.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "hot line" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-64
TN Hotline number (Subscriber B's number)
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *52*TN#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A does not dial any
number within 5 seconds
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #52#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example
Suppose the hot line number set by Subscriber A is 8883850, the operation process is
as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *52*8883850#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-65
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A does not dial any
number within 5 seconds
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #52#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

Note:
This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
Each subscriber can register only one subscriber for hot line service.
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.36 DIC/DLC (Long Distance Collect Call/Local Collect Call)
I. Meaning
DIC/DLC is collect call service. DIC refers to long distance collect call; DLC refers to
local collect call, which needs no support by Intelligent Network (IN).
Billing office Originating office Terminating office
9+Area code+
Subscriber number
Area code + Subscriber number
Number anaylsis, deleting 9
A
B

Figure 3-1 Diagram of DIC/DLC call
In view of function, a call will pass originating office, billing office and terminating
office. Originating office is where the caller locates, and terminating office is where the
callee locates. Billing office performs the billing function.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-66
Originating office and billing office can be the same office, and so are billing office and
terminating office. Or originating office, billing office and terminating office are all the
same office.
For a billing office, the called prefix should be set to "9" (for Brazilian standard, 9 is
the access code of DIC/DLC service, and the same below), the service type
corresponding to the prefix is "basic service", and the service attribute is "collect call".
In addition, it is also necessary to set number change, to delete the initial digit of the
called number (that is, 9), and to set the reanalysis of the number after conversion.
If the caller is not in the billing office, that is, the originating office and the billing office
are not the same one, the offices prior to the billing office (including the originating
office) should set "9" as an ordinary toll call prefix. The route corresponding to the
routing code of the prefix should be the one to the billing office. However, the routine
number deletion will not be executed.
II. Setting conditions
This service needs no registration or authority requirement. It can be used if only the
data are configured.
III. Operation
1) For caller
Dial 9+country number of the callee (area code + subscriber number).
Hear the waiting tone and prompt tone after the callee hooks off.
Talk with the callee (no charge on caller).
2) For callee (in the area supporting DIC/DLC)
Hear the waiting tone and prompt tone after hooking off.
Hang up before the prompt tone ends to release this call if the callee is unwilling
to pay for the call.
Hold the call and begin to talk after the prompt tone ends if the callee is willing to
pay for the call.
3) For trunk circuit from the originating office (caller) to the billing office
The address information transmitted is 9+country number of the callee (area
code + subscriber number).
For channel associated signaling, the II signal transmitted is the real calling type.
4) For trunk circuit from the billing office to the terminating office (callee)
The address information transmitted is the country number of the callee (area
code + subscriber number) or the subscriber number.
For channel associated signaling, II-8 message is transmitted.
5) For offices prior to the billing office (from the originating office to the billing office)
Restrict this call if the area where the callee is located does not support DIC/DLC;
otherwise, transmit it transparently. Generally, if an area does not support DIC/DLC
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-67
call, data restriction can be carried out directly at end office or tandem office. If this
area supports DIC/DLC call, data restriction should be made at the billing office.
6) If the office where the callee is located does not support DIC/DLC call
If there is collect call indication (II-8 or Bit M=1) during call setup, B7 or REL
message shall be returned from the office where the callee is located.
If there isn't collect call indication (II-8 or Bit M=0) during call setup, the callee will
return dual answer or short answer.
7) For billing office
Forwardly transmit collect call indication when 9+ country number of the callee
(area code + subscriber number) is received.
Backwardly transmit B5 when B7 (reject collect call) is received.
Backwardly transmit B5 or REL and clear forward when dual answer or short
answer is received (that is, the forward office does not support Collect Call).
Send waiting tone and prompt tone to the both parties when answer signal is
received.
Set up conversation if synchronous signal from the announcement playing
equipment (SIG) is received again.
IV. Example
1) Service registration
Null.
2) Service operation
Suppose Office A is the billing office. Set 9 as the prefix of collect call service.
Subscribers X and Y are in the Office A. The number of subscriber Y is ABCD.
Operation Expected result
1. Subscriber X dials 9ABCD.
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
3. Subscriber Y or X hangs up
within 12 seconds after Y hooks
off.
1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears
the ring back tone.
2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
time, the Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the
prompt tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND
THE CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
3. The call ends, and a bill with the conversation duration of 0 is
generated.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-68
Operation Expected result
1. Subscriber X dials 9ABCD.
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
3. Subscriber Y holds the call for
more than 12 seconds.
4. Subscriber Y or X hangs up
after M seconds conversation.
1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears
the ring back tone.
2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
3. Subscribers X and Y talk with each other.
4. A collect call bill with the conversation duration of M seconds
is generated.

Office A is set with the route to Office B (R2 or No. 7). The prefix is 9, and
Subscriber X is in Office A. Office B is the billing office. Set 9 as the prefix of
Collect Call service. Subscriber Y is in Office B. The number of Subscriber Y is
ABCD. PQ is the area code of the office where Subscriber Y is located.
Operation Expected result
1. Subscriber X dials 9PQABCD.
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
3. Subscriber Y or X hangs up
within 12 seconds after Y hooks
off.
1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears
the ring back tone.
2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
3. The call ends, and a bill with the conversation duration of 0 is
generated at office B.
1. Subscriber X dials 9PQABCD.
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
3. Subscriber Y holds the call for
more than 12 seconds.
4. Subscriber Y or X hangs up
after M seconds conversation.
1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears
the ring back tone.
2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
3. Subscribers X and Y talk with each other.
4. A collect call bill with the conversation duration of M seconds
is generated.

Office A is set with the route to Office B (R2 or No. 7). The prefix is 9, and
subscriber X is in Office A. Office B is the billing office. Set 9 as the prefix of
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-69
Collect Call service. Subscriber Y is in Office C. The number of Subscriber Y is
ABCD. PQ is the area code of the office where Subscriber Y is located.
Operation Expected result
1. Subscriber X dials 9PQABCD.
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
3. Subscriber Y or X hangs up
within 12 seconds after Y hooks
off.
1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears
the ring back tone.
2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
3. The call ends, and a bill with the conversation duration of 0 is
generated at Office B.
1. Subscriber X dials 9PQABCD.
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
3. Subscriber Y holds the call for
more than 12 seconds.
4. Subscriber Y or X hangs up
after M seconds conversation.
1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing, and subscriber X hears the
ring back tone.
2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
3. Subscribers X and Y talk with each other.
4. A collect call bill with the conversation duration of M seconds
is generated.

3) Service cancellation
Null.

Note:
The prefix "9" indicating DIC/DLC can be modified upon customer's requirement .

3.37 Do-not-Disturb Service (DDS)
I. Meaning
If Subscriber A has registered this service, when dialing the number of Subscriber A
(the callee) during the time period between service registration and cancellation,
Subscriber B (the caller) will hear the do-not-disturb tone.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-70
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "DDS" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
HH Hours set by the subscriber (00~23)
MM Minutes set by the subscriber (00~59)
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *56*HHMM# (on DTMF
phone) or 156HHMM (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
You will enjoy the do-not-disturb service without any operations after registration.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #56# (on DTMF phone) or
151156 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-71
Note:
When the call forwarding services (including call forwarding busy, call forwarding no replay and call
forwarding unconditional) and do-not-disturb service are all registered, the do-not-disturb service will
take precedence.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and do-not-disturb service.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy and do-not-disturb service.
When the do-not-disturb service is registered, the call waiting service becomes invalid.
When the do-not-disturb service is registered, the subscriber can not use the malicious call
identification service.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and do-not-disturb service.

3.38 Duplex and Distinct Ringing
This service enables a subscriber (DR Duplex Ringing subscriber) to have two
directory numbers (DN'A' and DNB) and receive different ringing and call waiting
tone depending on which number is dialed. Each DN is allowed to use some
supplementary services independently.
Before applying this service, the subscriber must set the ringing mode.

Note:
If the subscriber registered with this service dials DNA or DNB, busy tone will be heard.
When the subscriber hooks off, DNA is assigned for outgoing calls. When the subscriber dials a
special prefix (to be defined) to indicate operation for DNB, the DN will be changed to DNB per
call.
Only DNA can be applied when MCID is registered to DNA.
Only DNB can be applied when MCID is registered to DNB.
DNB cannot have/dial Intercom Number.
Calls terminated on IN will receive service treatment for DNA.
Call Waiting features can be assigned to DNA or DNB or both.
When the 2nd call terminates to DNA (or DNB), CW service is activated even if the 1st call
terminated to DNB (or DNA).
When the 2nd call terminates to DNA (or DNB), CW tone is sent in DNA (or DNB) pattern.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-72
3.39 Emergency Call Override
I. Meaning
If a prefix is set as "emergency call override = yes" during the supplementary
signaling setting, when a subscriber calls a number started with this prefix, he/she will
always have the calling authority, that is, the subscriber can call the numbers started
with this prefix at any time.
II. Setting conditions
The administrator sets a certain prefix as "emergency call override = yes" by
command ADD AUSSIG or MOD AUSSIG.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Call prefix
B Caller
C Callee with prefix A
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
ADD AUSSIG: PFX=K'A, CSC=0,
ERF=YES;
Or
MOD AUSSIG: PFX=K'A, CSC=0,
ERF=YES;
Operation succeeded
Set subscriber to be owing charge
SET OWED: SD=K'B, ED=K'B,
SETMODE=MANL, ICR=OUT;
Operation succeeded
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B calls Subscriber C
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

2) Service cancellation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-73
Operation Expected result
RMV AUSSIG: PFX=K'A, CSC=0;
Or
MOD AUSSIG: PFX=K'A, CSC=0, ERF=NO;
Operation succeeded
Set subscriber to be owing charge
SET OWED: SD=K'B, ED=K'B,
SETMODE=MANL, ICR=OUT;
Operation succeeded
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B calls Subscriber C Subscriber B hears CALL BARRING voice prompt

IV. Example
Suppose the call prefix is 888, Subscriber B's number is 8883850 and subscriber C's
number is 8883860, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
ADD AUSSIG: PFX=K'888, CSC=0, ERF=YES;
Or
MOD AUSSIG: PFX=K'888, CSC=0, ERF=YES;
Operation succeeded
Set subscriber to be owing charge
SET OWED: SD=K'8883850, ED=K'8883850,
SETMODE=MANL, ICR=OUT;
Operation succeeded
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials 8883860
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber C hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

2) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
RMV AUSSIG: PFX=K'888, CSC=0;;
Or
MOD AUSSIG: PFX=K'888, CSC=0,
ERF=NO;
Operation succeeded
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-74
Operation Expected result
Set subscriber to be owing charge
SET OWED: SD=K'8883850,
ED=K'8883850, SETMODE=MANL,
ICR=OUT;
Operation succeeded
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials 8883860 Subscriber B hears CALL BARRING voice prompt

3.40 Forced Release by Operator
I. Meaning
With this service, the operator can forcedly disconnect the calls to the subscribers in
the local group who are talking over the line.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Subscriber whose number is PQABCD
C Local ordinary subscriber
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-75
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber
B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *80*PQABCD#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement music,
Subscriber B hears the forced disconnection tone, and
Subscriber C hears the busy tone
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber Bs number is 8883850 and he/she uses a DTMF phone, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883850
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*80*8883850#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement music, Subscriber B
hears the forced disconnection tone, and Subscriber C hears the
busy tone
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-76
Note:
If Subscriber C is another operator or toll call subscriber, Subscriber A will hear the busy tone. It is
not allowed to use the "operator forced disconnection" in this case.
After the successful forced disconnection, Subscriber B hears the forced disconnection tone, while
the other party hears the busy tone. If the forced disconnection is failed, Subscriber B will not be
affected and the operator will hear the busy tone.
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.41 Hunting Group Service
This service is for PBX subscribers. A hunting group may include several subscriber
groups, each of which is composed of several subscribers in the same module.
21281111
21281112
21281113
21281114
21232111
21232112
21232113
21232114
28391111
28391112
28391113
28391114
Subscriber
Group 0
Subscriber
Group1
Subscriber
Group2
PBX Group 0

Figure 3-2 The structure of a hunting group
Each hunting group has a pilot number. When a subscriber dials the pilot number of
the group, the switch will hunt for an available line in the group to connect the call. If
all the lines in the group are busy, the call will be treated as callee busy.
The hunting mode can be sequential, circular or random.
The sequential mode means hunting from the first line to the last line in
sequence.
The circular mode means hunting from the line which was selected last time until
one circle of all lines are hunted.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-77
The random mode means hunting to each line in random.
Each line in the group has an individual discrete number. If the discrete number is
dialed, the call will be connected to the discrete line. If the line is busy, the call will be
treated as callee busy.
3.42 Immediate Hotline
I. Meaning
After the registration of the "immediate hotline" service, your phone set will
automatically call the designated number whenever you pick up the handset.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "immediate hotline" authority (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Hotline subscriber whose number is PQABCD
C Another subscriber different from A
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*521*PQABCD#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-78
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials #521*As
number #
Subscriber C hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber C hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber Bs number is 8883850 and Subscriber A uses a DTMF phone
with the number of 8883851, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*521*8883850#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials
#521*8883851#
Subscriber C hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber C hangs up Service cancelled


Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-79
Note:
With the hotline service registered, the subscriber should not apply for the services which restrict
outgoing calls.
This service cannot be cancelled by the registered phone.

3.43 List Conference Service
I. Meaning
With this service registered, the subscriber may register the participants of a
telephone conference in a list, and then he/she can convene such a conference by
implementing this list. The subscriber is free to add members to or delete members
from the list. While the list conference is being held, the convener is able to convene
or delete a participant temporarily.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "list conference" authority (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute"
of command ADD CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber with the "list conference" authority
B Ordinary subscriber
C Ordinary subscriber
D Ordinary subscriber
E Ordinary subscriber
k Conference list
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*k*B's number#
(on DTMF phone) or 181k+Bs number
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful registration of the service
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-80
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber B has become a member of conference list k
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*k*C's number #
(on DTMF phone) or 181k+Cs number
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber C has become a member of conference list k
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*k*D's number #
(on DTMF phone) or 181k+Ds number
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber D has become a member of conference list k

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *84*k# (on DTMF
phone) or 184k (on Pulse phone)
Subscribers B, C and D hear the ringing tone
simultaneously. After they hook off in turn, subscribers A,
B, C and D begin to talk with each other
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, Subscribers
B, C and D hear the prompt tone of the telephone
conference
Subscriber A dials E's number
Subscriber E hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A
hears the ring back tone
Subscriber E hooks off
Subscribers A, B, C, D and E begin to talk with each
other
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber B, C, D and E hear the prompt tone of the
conference telephone
Subscriber A dials #82*k*B's number #
(on DTMF phone) or 151181B's number
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber B hears the busy tone, and Subscribers A, C,
D and E begin to talk with each other
Subscriber C hangs up Subscribers A, D and E talks
Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers D and E hear the busy tone

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-81
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A dials #81*k*B's number #
(on DTMF phone) or 151181k+B's
number (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Conference list k includes Subscribers C and D
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #83*k# (on DTMF
phone) or 183k (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Conference list k is deleted

IV. Example
A Service subscriber with the "list conference" authority, whose number is
8883010
B Ordinary subscriber, his number is 8883020
C Ordinary subscriber, his number is 8883030
D Ordinary subscriber, his number is 8883040
E Ordinary subscriber, his number is 8883050
Conference list number (k) is 0.
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*0*8883020#
(on DTMF phone) or 18108883020
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber B has become a member of conference list 0
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*0*8883030#
(on DTMF phone) or 18108883030
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber C has become a member of conference list 0
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*0*8883040#
(on DTMF phone) or 18108883040
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber D has become a member of conference list 0

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-82
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *84*0# (on DTMF
phone) or 1840 (on Pulse phone)
Subscribers B, C and D hear the ringing tone
simultaneously. After they hook off in turn, Subscribers A,
B, C and D begin to talk with each other
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, Subscribers
B, C and D hear the prompt tone of conference telephone
Subscriber A dials 8883050
Subscriber E hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A
hears the ring back tone
Subscriber E hooks off
Subscribers A, B, C, D and E begin to talk with each
other
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber B, C, D and E hear the prompt tone of the
conference telephone
Subscriber A dials #82*0*8883020# (on
DTMF phone) or 1511818883020 (on
Pulse phone)
Subscriber B hears the busy tone, and Subscribers A, C,
D and E begin to talk with each other
Subscriber C hangs up Subscribers A, D and E talks
Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers D and E hear the busy tone

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #81*0*8883020# (on
DTMF phone) or 15118108883020 (on
Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Conference list 0 includes Subscribers C and D
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #83*0# (on DTMF
phone) or 1830 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Conference list 0 is deleted

Note:
Each subscriber shall have at most 4 conference lists (0~3).

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-83
3.44 Inquiry Service
I. Meaning
When a subscriber (as caller or callee) is in conversation, he/she can call a third party
by pressing the hook to set up a new conversation, and at the same time the previous
conversation party holds on. The subscriber can switch between two conversation
parties by hooking and dialup: release one party or select one party.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is not required to register this service on phone set, but is only
required to own "inquiry" authority. Service authority can be set by command ADD ST
or MOD ST. Set the national code to Brazil by command SET OFI.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Subscriber who is in conversation with Subscriber A first
C Subscriber called by Subscriber A when A and B are in conversation
1) Service registration
The subscriber is not required to register this service on phone set, but is only
required to own "inquiry" authority.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
When Subscribers A and B are in
conversation, Subscriber A
presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber B
hears the music
Subscriber A dials the number of
Subscriber C
Subscriber C hears the ringing tone, Subscriber A hears the
ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears the music
Subscriber C hooks off
Subscribers A and C are in conversation, and Subscriber B
hears the music
Subscriber A presses the hook
and then dials "2"
Subscribers A and B are in conversation, and Subscriber C
hears the music
Subscriber A presses the hook
and then dials "1"
Subscribers A and C are in conversation, and Subscriber B
hears the busy tone
Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-84
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Subscriber who is in conversation with Subscriber A first
C Subscriber called by Subscriber A when A and B are in conversation, whose
number is 8883850
1) Service registration
The subscriber is not required to register this service on phone set, but is only
required to own "inquiry" authority.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
When Subscribers A and B are in
conversation, Subscriber A
presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber B
hears the music
A dials 8883850
Subscriber C hears the ringing tone, Subscriber A hears the
ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears the music
Subscriber C hooks off
Subscribers A and C are in conversation, and Subscriber B
hears the music
Subscriber A presses the hook
and then dials "2"
Subscribers A and B are in conversation, and Subscriber C
hears the music
Subscriber A presses the hook
and then dials "1"
Subscribers A and C are in conversation, and Subscriber B
hears the busy tone
Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-85
Note:
Suppose:
A -- Subscriber activating Inquiry service
B --Subscriber who is in conversation with Subscriber A first
C -- Subscriber called by Subscriber A when A and B are in conversation
If Subscriber A hangs up when waiting for digit collection after hooking, the previous hold-on
conversation can be resumed in the following way: call Subscriber A, and if A hooks off before B
hangs up or before the protection duration times out, the conversation between A and B can be
resumed.
2) Before a new conversation is established, the subscriber A can return to the conversation with
Subscriber B by hooking to give up calling Subscriber C.
3) After a new conversation is established, the subscriber A can:
a) Switch between two conversation parties by dialing "2" after hooking;
b) Release the party currently in conversation by dialing "1" after hooking;
c) Return to the previous conversation by hooking when hearing the busy tone in case of dialing timeout
after hooking;
d) Release the hold-on party by dialing "0" after hooking;
e) Return to the previous conversation by dialing any number except "0", "1" or "2" after hooking.
If Subscriber A hangs up during conversation, the current conversation party will be released by
normal process. At the same time, Subscriber A hears the ringing tone, and he/she will talk with the
previous hold-on party after hooking off.
If Subscriber B (or C) hangs up when talking with Subscriber A, he/she will be released by normal
call process. At the same time, Subscriber A can talk with the rest party by hooking during release.
If the hold-on party hangs up, he/she will be released by normal call process without affecting the
ongoing conversation.
The switch determines whether the Inquiry call can be originated by analyzing (at least) the first 4
digits of the inquiry number, so as to limit the Inquiry call to a certain area.
The call barring group number 60003 is designated to restrict CF by local subscribers. When a local
subscriber activates Inquiry service, in addition to the judgment of outgoing call authority of the
subscriber, 60003 will be taken as the call barring group number of the subscriber to check the
outgoing call authority.
Bit 9 of the CCB operation parameter 1 determines whether to check Inquiry call of the subscriber:
= 0, no check;
= 1, use 60003 to query call barring data and check outgoing call authority.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-86

Note:
Before using a service, carry out the ADD CNACLD command to add the service prefix. Otherwise,
the service will be unavailable.
Both the administrator and authorized subscriber can activate and deactivate a service. That is, the
administrator can carry out the REG NSV command to activate a service and the RMV NSV
command to deactivate a service, and an authorized subscriber can activate and deactivate a
service on a telephone through dialing the access code. Only the last setting is effective.

3.45 Making, Modifying and Removing Tones and
Announcements on Line
I. Meaning
The tone mentioned above refers to the tone from the Signal Tone Board (SIG) that
frequently played, such as dialing tone and busy tone.
II. Setting conditions
Null.
III. Operation
ADD/MOD SIGSET: setting and modifying the tone playing mode of the SIG tone.
ADD/MOD SIGSLOT: resetting and modifying the tone playing channel used by the
SIG tone by default.

Note:
Because modification and setting of SIG tone will make a big impact on other aspects, please be sure to
read the description in the following Note carefully before modification.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-87
IV. Example
Set the tone file played by No. 10 tone on the SIG of the SM to FFFFF802, and
the mode is the basic playing mode:
ADD SIGSET: IDX=10, SC1="FFFFF802", METHOD=SM, SSTSM=BAS;
Set the tone file played by No. 10 tone on the Special Tone Board (SPD) of the
SPM to FFFFF840 and the mode is the synchronous playing mode:
MOD SIGSET: IDX=10, SC1="FFFFF840", METHOD=SPM, SSTSPM=SYN;
Modification of SIGSET and SIGSLOT can change some timeslots for tone
playing. For example, to set Timeslot 10 to send the dialing tone:
Step one: modify No. 10 tone of the SIGSET to the dialing tone (FFFFF803 is a
dialing tone):
MOD SIGSET: IDX=10, SC1="FFFFF803", METHOD=SM, SSTSM=BAS;
Step two: use ADD SIGSLOT to map dialing tone to the timeslot corresponding
to the SIG (the SIG uses HW 48 and HW 71):
ADD SIGSLOT: MN=10, ST=ST3, HW=48, SN=10;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-88
Note:
The SIG only has 2 HWs for playing various tones, while the SPD has 8 HWs and it can use 4 HWs
(totally 128 channels) to play asynchronous tone. This difference also leads to the different
parameter settings between the SIG and the SPD.
Three SIG/SPD tone playing modes, which can be set by ADD/MOD SIGSET, are described as
follows:
a) BAS --- (BASIC SIGNAL) basic tone playing mode. By adopting this mode, the tone occupies a fixed
timeslot for cyclic playing, and only if the subscriber timeslot is connected to this timeslot, tones can be
heard. This mode is generally applicable to important and frequently-used tones, such as dialing tone,
busy tone.
b) SYN --- (SYNCHRONOUS) synchronous tone playing mode. By adopting this mode, it is necessary to
dynamically apply for channels for tone playing, thus a separate timeslot can be provided to each
subscriber for tone playing to avoid affecting each other. This tone playing mode is applicable to MCID
service.
c) ASYN --- (ASYNCHRONOUS) asynchronous tone playing mode. It is also necessary to dynamically
apply for channel for tone playing, but it is unnecessary to occupy multiple timeslots in case of hearing
this tone by multiple subscribers simultaneously, instead, all the subscribers are connected to the same
timeslot. Therefore, HW resource on the SIG can be saved (the timeslot can be released for other
services when no subscriber hears the tone). This tone playing mode is applicable to 117 and most of
tones with fixed content.
One signal tone setting command can set a maximum of three SIG tone files, but generally one SIG
tone only uses one file.
Currently, more than 90 tones have been used by various services, however, one SIG of the SM can
only use two HWs (totally 64 timeslots), so "BAS" cannot be configured to all services.
When set by ADD SIGSET, the Service Processing Module (SPM) does not use ASYNCHRONOUS
mode, for SPD can provide 128 tone channels, thus, it is unnecessary to adopt SM processing mode
due to no resource limit.
Be cautious in using ADD SIGSLOT and ADD SIGSET, because the modification will affect all
subscribers. In normal case, there is the default SIGSET configuration data. It is better not to modify
SIG tone setting if unnecessary.
In order to ensure the normal playing of some frequently-used tones, they can only be configured in
"BAS" mode, and no modification is allowed. The signal tones are 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 23, 29, 51, 54, 60, 61
and 62.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-89
3.46 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) Service
I. Meaning
After the registration of this service, if the subscriber receives malicious calls, he/she
will be able to find out the number(s) of the telephone set(s) from which the malicious
calls are originated.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "MCID" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Caller
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off after hearing the
ringing tone
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks and dials *33# (on DTMF
phone) or directly dials "4" or above numbers
(on Pulse phone) while talking
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful malicious call identification, and the
BAM generates alarms
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-90
Note:
When the do-not-disturb service is registered, the subscriber cannot use malicious call identification
service.
When the absent subscriber service is registered, the subscriber cannot use malicious call
identification service.
When the malicious call identification service is registered, even if the caller does not provide his/her
number, the Telecommunication Office can still find out the number of the subscriber who has made
the malicious calls.
The subscriber can trace the malicious call during or after the conversation.
The subscriber can hear the prompt voice "The number you traced is " or music when the
malicious call identification is successful. After the music, you can ask the office administrator for the
traced number.
The duration of the prompt voice (music) varies from 20 to 30 seconds according to the length of the
traced number. The original talk before the trace will be automatically restored when the prompt
voice ends.
For the subscriber using DTMF phone, the original talk will be restored if he/she does not dial after
hooking or he/she hooks during the play of the prompt voice.
The switch administration system of the office records the malicious call identification cases and
operator can query the records by use of the command LST ALMMAL.

3.47 Message Waiting Notification
Message Waiting Notification (MWN) is a feature which activates and deactivates a
visual indicator on CPE and an audible shutter dialing tone through the telephone
handset to notify the subscriber that a new message (voice or fax) is deposited in
his/her mailbox and waiting for retrieval.
The visual indicator may be as simple as lighting or flashing a Light Emitting Diode
(LED) or as advanced as displaying a special message on a liquid crystal display.
When the subscriber hooks off, shutter dialing tone will be heard if the Message
Waiting Information (MWI) of the subscriber is set to ON. Normal dialing tone will be
provided if the MWI of the subscriber is set to OFF.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-91
Note:
The activation/deactivation of visual MWI and shutter dialing tone is triggered by the Voice Mailbox
(VM) and controlled by the switch. No customer procedure is required.
A special phone set (CID-II) is need in this service.

3.48 Modify Password
I. Meaning
This service enables the subscribers to change their passwords.
II. Setting conditions
This service can be used directly without registration.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
SSSS Original password
TTTT New password typed for the first time
RRRR New password typed for the second time (RRRR=TTTT, valid setting)
1) Service registration
This service can be used directly without registration.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *541*SSSS*TTTT*
RRRR#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone
indicating successful setting of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Null.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-92
IV. Example
If Subscriber As original password is 1234 and new password is 1111, the operation
process is as follows:
1) Service registration
This service can be used directly without registration.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*541*1234*1111*1111#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful setting of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Null.

Note:
If the password SSSS is not correctly entered or TTTT is not the same as RRRR, Subscriber A will
hear the voice prompt for error during operation.
The password consists of four digits, excluding * or #.
In order to avoid misoperation, a new password should be entered twice for confirmation. If required,
one-time input of the password can be achieved by modifying service grammar analysis
configuration data.

3.49 Multiple Wake-ups
I. Meaning
With this service registered, the subscriber will be waken up by the switch at the
same pre-set time every day.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "multiple wake-ups" authority (you can use the command
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-93
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
HH Hours set by the subscriber (00~23)
MM Minutes set by the subscriber (00~59)
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *60*HHMM#
(on DTMF phone) or 160HHMM
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Everyday, when the pre-set time arrives, the switch will send the ringing tone to
Subscriber A authomatically. This service is implemented the same as the "wake up"
service.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #60# (on DTMF phone)
or 151160 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example
Subscriber A Service subscriber
HH = 12
MM = 30
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *60*1230# (on
DTMF phone) or 1601230 (on
Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
registration of the service
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-94
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
After successful registration, at 12:30 every day, the switch will automatically send the
ringing tone to Subscriber A. When Subscriber A hooks off, he/she will hear the
wake-up prompt tone. If Subscriber A does not hook off, after 5 minutes, the switch
will again send the ringing tone. The switch will ring Subscriber A twice everyday at
most.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #60# (on DTMF phone) or
151160(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

3.50 No Disturb When Calling
I. Meaning
With this service registered, while a subscriber is in conversation, other subscribers
(operators) will not be able to intrude, supervise or disconnect the call.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "no disturb when calling" authority (you can use the command
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber, whose number is PQABCD
B Ordinary subscriber
C Operator
Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber B.
1) Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-95
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials
*80*PQABCD#
Subscriber C hears the busy tone, and Subscriber A continues
to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C fails to disconnect the call
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials
*99*PQABCD#
Subscriber C hears the busy tone, and Subscriber A continues
to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C fails to supervise the call
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials
*70*PQABCD#
Subscriber C hears the busy tone, and Subscriber A continues
to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C fails to intrude the call

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
A Service subscriber, whose number is 8883010
B Ordinary subscriber, whose number is 8883020
C Operator
Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber B.
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials *80*8883010#
Subscriber C hears the busy tone, and Subscriber A continues
to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C fails to disconnect the call
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials *99*8883010#
Subscriber C hears the busy tone, and Subscriber A continues
to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C fails to supervise the call
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials *70*8883010#
Subscriber C hears the busy tone, and Subscriber A continues
to talk with Subscriber B
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-96
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C fails to intrude the call

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
3.51 Number Barring
I. Meaning
Number barring refers to call originating restriction. With this service, outgoing calls to
the restricted numbers will be barred.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "number barring" authority (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber using a DTMF phone with the password of SSSS
TN Telephone number to be barred
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*64*SSSSTN#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials TN Subscriber A hears the non-authorization tone
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-97
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
#64*SSSSTN#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber As password is 1234 and the number to be barred is 8883850,
the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*64*12348883850#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
If Subscribers A dials 8883850 Subscriber A hears the non-authorization tone
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
#64*12348883850#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-98
Note:
When this service is registered, you will hear the non-authorization tone if you dial the barred
number.
A subscriber can register as many as 100 barred numbers.
To cancel all the barred numbers, dial #641*SSSS#.

3.52 Number Incomplete
I. Meaning
The subscriber registered with this service sets the complete number flag to "No", and
then his/her number (or name) will not be displayed on the callee's phone set even if
the callee has CLIP authority.
II. Setting conditions
This service can be activated only if the subscriber has the "number incomplete"
authority. Service authority can be set by command ADD ST or MOD ST.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Callee registered with CLIP service
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for the "number incomplete" authority.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A hears
the ring back tone. The number of Subscriber A will not be
displayed on the phone set of B
Subscriber B hooks off Subscribers A and B talk with each other
Subscriber B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-99
IV. Example
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Callee, registered with CLIP service, whose number is 8883850
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for the "number incomplete" authority.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A hears
the ring back tone. The number of Subscriber A will not be
displayed on the phone set of B
Subscriber B hooks off Subscribers A and B talk with each other
Subscriber B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
3.53 Number Portability (NP)
This service is also called "Telephone Moved without Number Changed" service, a
type of intelligent service. That is, the subscriber can keep his/her phone number
unchanged when moving to another place, thus a permanent personal number can be
provided to the subscriber. The service is implemented through the data processing
by a platform in a local network.
Suppose a subscriber, whose number "a" is in Office A, moves to Office B, and Office
B allocates a number "b" to the subscriber. NP service can be achieved in the
following way: If another subscriber dials the number "a", after the originating or
tandem office receives the number "a", it will find that the number should be
processed with NP analysis. The analysis result shows that the subscriber is a NP
subscriber (originally in Office A, now in Office B). With the new number "b" obtained,
the call can be put through.
The number "a" is callee Directory Number (DN), which will not be changed even if
the subscriber moves to another place. Therefore, it is a permanent number for the
subscriber. The number "b" is callee Network Number (NN), which is the subscriber's
network number to be transferred between switches.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-100
For example, Subscriber A lived in District A and his/her phone number was 6543210
originally. Now, Subscriber A lives in District B and the new number is 2345678.
Subscriber A has applied for a NP number 7777777. In this way, wherever he/she
moves, any district or any city, other subscribers can call him/her by dialing 7777777.
The following text gives the data configuration procedures.
Hardware configuration
Configure a Central Database Processing Board (CDP) and the CDP function NP1 or
NP2.
Use the command ADD NPSET to set the attributes of the server connected with the
specified CDP. It should be noted that the port number must be 5352.
Subscriber data configuration
Modify the NP query flag of Subscriber A's call source to YES.
Use the command MOD NPATTR to modify the NP attribute of the module where
Subscriber A is located, that is, to modify the number of the CDP module to be
queried. The module number here refers to the function module number of the CDP,
which is the difference between 211 and the board group number of the CDP.
Modify the start NP query position of the prefix 7777 to 7, so as to ensure that NP
analysis is performed only after 7 digits are received if the prefix is 7777.
Server setting
Execute the Structured Query Language (SQL) script, connect the NP server and run
the program NPserver.exe.
Add a record ('7777777', '6543210') in the HKNP table. When Subscriber A's phone
number is changed to 2345678, it is only necessary to modify the data in the data
table.
3.54 Operator Call Barring
I. Meaning
The subscriber registered with this service can prohibit the international incoming
calls from operators speaking English, French, German, Spanish or Russian.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is not required to register this service on phone set, but is only
required to own "operator call barring" authority. Service authority can be set by
command ADD ST or MOD ST.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-101
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B International operator
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for the "operator call barring" authority.
2) Service operation
When operator B makes an international toll call to Subscriber A, he/she will hear the
barring tone.
3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
3.55 Operator Intrusion
I. Meaning
This service entitles the operator to break in the converation of the local subscribers
who are talking over the line.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Operator
B Local ordinary subscriber whose number is PQABCD
C Local ordinary subscriber
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-102
1) Service registration
Apply for the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber
B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials * 70 * PQABCD #
Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber
B talks with Subscriber A

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
If Subscriber Bs number is 8883850 and Subscriber A uses a DTMF phone, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883850
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber
B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *70*8883850#
Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber
B talks with Subscriber A

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-103
Note:
If Subscriber C is another local operator or toll call subscriber, Subscriber A will hear the busy tone.
It is not allowed to use "operator insertion" in this case.
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.56 Operator Monitoring
I. Meaning
This service entitles the operator to monitor the calls made by the local office
subscribers.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Operator
B Subscriber whose number is PQABCD
C Local ordinary subscriber
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-104
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*99*PQABCD#
Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber A hears
the conversation between Subscribers B and C
Subscriber A hangs up The conversation keeps on

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber Bs number is 8883850, and he/she uses a DTMF phone, the
operation process is below:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883850
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
If Subscriber A dials
*99*8883850#
Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C Subscriber A hears the
conversation between Subscribers B and C
Subscriber A hangs up The conversation keeps on

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-105
Note:
If Subscriber C is another local operator or toll call subscriber, Subscriber A will hear the busy tone.
It is not allowed to use "operator monitoring" in this case.
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.
The monitoring duration is 60 seconds. Monitoring is terminated after 60 seconds and the
conversation the monitored subscribers will not be affected.
The operator can only monitor the local calls of the ordinary subscribers.
During the monitoring, Subscribers B and C can not hear the speech of Subscriber A.

3.57 Operator Override DDS
I. Meaning
By setting the software parameter, this service controls whether the operator (as the
caller) can override Do-not-Disturb Service if the callee registers DDS.
II. Setting conditions
This service requires no authority, and it is only necessary to modify the user type to
operator (by command ADD ST or MOD ST).
III. Operation
The operator calls a subscriber registered with DDS. Use software parameter to
control whether to allow the operator to call in.

Note:
The software parameter used: (OVS_CCB_PARA3)
BIT4: corresponding to software parameter IF_ALW_EXCEL_DONOTDISTURB
(OVS_CCB_PARA3_BIT4)
Used to control whether operator is allowed to override DDS;
1: override allowed (by default)
0: override not allowed

IV. Example
Refer to operation.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-106
3.58 Outgoing Call Barring Service
I. Meaning
When a subscriber has "Outgoing Call barring" service registered, he/she can prohibit
the calls to a certain range of numbers. Anyone who dials such numbers will hear the
non-authorization tone.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "outgoing call barring" authority (you can use the command
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
K 0-15 (acquiring authorities accordingly based on data)
SSSS Password of the subscriber
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *54*SSSSK# (on DTMF
phone) or 154SSSSK (on Pulse phone)
If the password is correct, Subscriber A hears the
acknowledgement tone of the successful service
registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
When you dials a number that is barred on a telephone set registered with the
outgoing call barring service, you will hear the prompt tone.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #54*SSSSK# (on DTMF
phone) or 151154SSSSK
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-107
IV. Example
If the password is 1234 and the call-out authority K is 1, the operation process is as
follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *54*12341# (on DTMF
phone) or 15412341 (on Pulse phone)
If the password is correct, Subscriber A hears the
acknowledgement tone of the successful service
registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
When you dials a number that is barred on a telephone set registered with the
outgoing call barring service, you will hear the prompt tone.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #54*12341# (on DTMF
phone) or dials 15115412341
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
When registering, verifying or canceling this service, the subscriber does not have the authority for
the outgoing call barring service, the non-authorization tone is heard.
For the corresponding relationship between K value and the outgoing call authorization, refer to the
data.
Registered with the hotline service, the subscriber should not apply for the services which restrict
outgoing calls.
Registered with the three-party service, the subscriber should not apply for the services which
restrict outgoing calls.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-108
3.59 Park on
I. Meaning
On registering this service, subscribers can restrict outgoing calls (excluding
emergency calls) and local incoming calls for the temporary, and control whether to
allow incoming toll calls by software parameter.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "Park on" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of
command ADD CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
SSSS Subscriber A's password
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *31*SSSS# (on
DTMF phone) or 131SSSS (on pulse
phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A makes an emergency
call
The call can be put through, and the conversation quality is
normal
Subscriber A calls other subscribers
(not for emergency calls)
Subscriber A hears call barring prompt tone
Other local subscribers call
Subscriber A
The caller hears do-not-disturb prompt tone
Other subscribers make toll calls to
Subscriber A
Software parameters determine whether to access the call;
otherwise, do-not-disturb tone will be heard

3) Service cancellation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-109
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #31*SSSS# (on
DTMF phone) or #131SSSS (on
pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

Note:
On registering this service, whether to allow incoming toll calls is controlled by the following parameter:
(OVS_CCB_PARA1)
BIT 11: whether to prohibit toll calls (ALLOW_TOLL_CALLIN)
=1: toll call prohibited (by default)
=0: toll call allowed

IV. Example
Refer to operation.
3.60 Password Call
I. Meaning
When an ordinary subscriber does not have the toll call authority, this service enables
the subscriber to make toll calls by entering correct password.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "password call" authority (you can use the command ADD ST
or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber whose password is SSSS, without toll call authority
PQABCD Toll call number
1) Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-110
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *42*SSSS# (on DTMF
phone) or 142SSSS (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the second dialing tone
Subscriber A dials PQABCD Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
The callee hooks off Both parties talk with each other
Subscriber A hangs up The talk ends

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber A's password is 1234, who has no toll call authority, and the
callee's number is 021-56608000, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *42*1234# (on DTMF
phone) or 1421234 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the second dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 021-56608000 Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
The callee hooks off Both parties talk with each other
Subscriber A hangs up The talk ends

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
Password call can override all the outgoing authority checks. For example, if a subscriber does not have
the outgoing call authority, he/she can make outgoing calls through this service.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-111
3.61 Playback
I. Meaning
This service enables the subscriber to play back the recorded voice announcement
carried by some designated timeslots.
II. Setting conditions
You can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it, and the service has been
registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Operator
MMM Module number
NNN Timeslots to be recorded; it can be only timeslot 0, 1, 34 or 35 (when the signal
tone board is CB01) or any timeslot except timeslot 9 (when the signal tone board is
CB02, and two CB02s are configured at the same time).
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
#79*MMM*NNN#
Subscriber A hears the voice announcement recorded in the
timeslot corresponding to the signal tone board
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
If Subscriber A is to play back the recorded voice announcement in timeslot 34, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-112
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
#79*001*034#
Subscriber A hears the voice announcement recorded in the
timeslot corresponding to the signal tone board
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
This service cannot be applied on the pulse phone.

3.62 PrePaid Service (PPS)
I. Meaning
PPS in ISP mode can be divided into four types: subscriber bound mode, card service
mode, card bound mode and two-stage dialing service. The latter three modes are
PPS in card mode.
Subscriber bound mode, a phone set bound service, features in binding of PPS
account and phone set. The subscriber needs to make calls on the phone set
registered with this service, and the number dialing is relatively easier than that of
PPS in card mode, without complicated tone interaction and digit collection process.
Based on the location of PPS equipment in the network, PPS of binding type can be
divided into local binding mode and centralized binding mode. Local binding means
that both PPS subscriber and PPS equipment are located at the same end office, and
the subscriber is authenticated by PPS equipment after hooking off. The number
dialing is the same as that of ordinary subscribers. Centralized binding means that
PPS equipment is located at a tandem office, and the PPS subscriber at the end
office is connected to this tandem office after hooking off and dialing the access code.
Inter-office signaling must support the transmission of calling number, based on which
the PPS equipment performs the authentication. To activate this service, an access
code must be added before the called number sent by the opposite office.
PPS in card mode enables subscribers to make calls on any DTMF phone set and
record the charge on specified account. The subscribers registered with this service
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-113
must have a unique personal card number. When activating this service, the
subscriber should input the access code, card number, password and called number
according to the prompt. Based on charging mode and use method, there are four
types of account card services: A-category subscribers (charged monthly):
Subscribers who have been installed with phone sets apply for account card service,
and if they are qualified after examined by the Telecommunication Office, they can
pay the bill by month. B-category subscribers (prepaid subscribers): When applying
for this service, subscribers must prepay a certain amount of money, which will be
deducted by each call. If the prepaid sum is used up during conversation, the system
will terminate the service, and the subscriber should repay the money for continuing
the service. If the subscriber requires to cancel the account card, the
Telecommunication Office should return the balance in the account card. C-category
subscribers (one-off subscribers): Subscribers buy account card with a certain value
and use it within the specified time limit. The fee will be deducted by each call, and if
the sum in the card is used up, the system will terminate the service. D-category
subscribers (one-off subscribers without password): Subscribers buy account card
with a certain value and use it within the specified time limit. The fee will be deducted
by each call, and if the sum in the card is used up, the system will terminate the
service. Subscribers of this category have no password, while A-category, B-category
and C-category subscribers have. Currently, this system supports B-category and
C-category subscribers only.
Card binding is subdivided into type-1 binding and type-3 binding. Type-1 binding
refers to one card-one phone set mode, that is, the subscriber binds one card on one
phone set. Type-3 binding refers to multiple cards-one phone set mode, that is,
multiple card subscribers (identified by subscriber number) use one phone set. A
group can have a maximum of three subscribers. For using this service, subscribers
need to make calls on the phone set registered with this service, and they can
register by themselves the card numbers to be bound on phone set. Currently, the
system supports the binding of B-category and C-category card.
For authentication subscribers, two-stage dialing service mainly functions in
authenticating subscriber identity and secondary digit collection upon hearing the
secondary dialing tone. Budget and call monitoring are not provided for this type of
subscribers.
II. Setting conditions
Configuration of ISP
Configuration of ISP includes two aspects: physical data configuration and function
item configuration.
1) Physical data configuration
[Command]: ADD BRD
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-114
[Example]:
Add an ISP:
ADD BRD: MN=0, F=1, S=7, BT=ISP;
BT stands for board type.
2) Function item configuration
[Command]: ADD ISPFUNC
[Example]:
Configure a certain ISP to store PPS data:
ADD ISPFUNC: FCF=BILL, BG=1;
FCF stands for ISP function item type.
Configuration of tone-playing & digit-collection resource
1) Configuration of centralized digit collection frame in SM
[Command]: ADD BDIN
[Example]:
ADD BDIN: MN=90, F=4, LN=0, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=0, N1=12, N2=13, N3=14,
N4=15, HW1=4, HW2=6, HW3=8, HW4=10, BV=CQ02;

Note:
Command ADD BDIN is used to configure the Decode Interface (DIN) frame. Command parameter "BV"
stands for the version of the Special Tone Board (SPT), and CQ02 should be selected. NOD and HW in
the parameter need to keep consistency with the actual physical connections.

2) Configuration of SRM frame in AM
[Command]: ADD SRMFRM
[Example]:
ADD SRMFRM: FN=18, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=0;
3) CDB function item configuration
[Command]: ADD CDBFUNC
[Example]:
ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=SPD, BG=0;
ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=DTR, BG=0;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-115
Note:
Because SPM resource is managed by the AM, Central Database (CDB) must be configured. A group of
CDPs can be configured with multiple functions, however, each function can only be configured to one
group of CDPs. Repetitive addition is not allowed. The ISP card service requires the configuration of the
SPD and DTR management function for the CDB.

4) Physical data configuration for SPD/SPT/SRC/DIN
[Command]: ADD BRD
[Example]:
ADD BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=4, BT=SPD;
5) Function item configuration for SPD
[Command]: ADD SPDCFG
[Example]:
ADD SPDCFG: FN=18, BN=4, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=0;
6) Function item configuration for SRC
[Command]: ADD SRCCFG
[Example]:
ADD SRCCFG: FN=18, BN=6, DSP1=DTR, DSP2=DTR, DSP3=FSK, DSP4=COF,
LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=16;
In the above example, two DSPs on the Shared Resource Board (SRC) are
configured as Dual Tone Transmit/Receive Board (DTR)s, and another two Digital
Signal Process (DSP)s provide Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) and conference call
resource respectively.
Configuration of resource data
Resource data configuration here means the configuration of the data for
management of IN module on resource used in the card service, including resource
capability, resource searching, language index data and currency index.
1) Resource capability configuration
[Command]: ADD SSPSRC
[Example]:
ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=200, MN=255;
SSP dedicated resource capability indicates which modules are provided with the
resource capability for a specific service. In the command, module number ranges
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-116
from 0 to 255. 255 indicates that all the modules are provided with the resource
capability for this service. The setting in the above example shows that all local
modules have the resource capability for 200 card service.
2) Resource searching data
[Command]: ADD SRCSRH
[Example]:
ADD SRCSRH: MDU=90, SRC=BRD, STATE=USE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=91, MDU2=92,
MDU3=93, MDU4=94;
If a local module has no available resource, it can request other modules for the
resource after configured with this data.
It is recommended to adopt the fixed searching mode. Refer to the following table for
the sequence of the modules to be searched.
Table 3-2 Example of resource searching data
Module number
No. 1 Searched
Module
No. 2 Searched
Module
No. 3 Searched
Module
No. 4 Searched
Module
1 2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5 1
3 4 5 1 2
4 5 1 2 3
5 1 2 3 4

Note:
In addition to traffic statistics and routine message transmission and reception between modules, lots of
messages will also be transmitted between modules in case of using resource of multiple modules,
therefore, the traffic rate among SMs should be 512 kbit/s to avoid communication failure, and there will
be no problem when the traffic rate among SPMs is 2 Mbit/s

3) Language index data
Language index must be configured as 10, indicating the language index used by the
first voice announcement issued. Generally it is necessary to configure the data for
default language index, which should be set in command SET PPSCFG.
[Command]: ADD INLNG
[Example]:
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-117
ADD INLNG: LI=10, LT1=64, LT2=20;
ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;
Example 1 indicates to first play the English version (0X40) of the voice
announcement issued as language index 10, and then the Spanish version (0x14).
Example 2 indicates only to play the English version of the voice announcement
issued as language index 1. Please refer to the following Note for the voice
announcement corresponding relations.
4) Currency index data
[Command]: ADD CURIDX
[Example]:
ADD CURIDX: LNG=64, CUR=1, UNT1="00000135", UNTS1="00000136",
UNT3="00000137", UNTS3="00000138";
The data for playing currency index 1 in English (0x40) is added in the above
example. Singular main currency is played by basic voice announcement 00000135,
and the main currency in plural form is played by basic voice announcement
00000136. Fractional currency 1 is not played. Fractional currency 2 in single form is
played by 00000137, and that in plural form is played by 00000138.

Note:
Card service in ISP mode does not support multiple currencies, and the currency index issued in the
service is fixed to 1.

Configuration of service data
Switch data configuration for PPS monthly rental subscribers:
1) Call source data
Specify a dedicated call source for the monthly rental subscribers and configure the
number preparation data. The access code for monthly rental service will be inserted
before the called number when the caller hooks off and dials a number. For example,
ADD CALLSRC: CSC=10, DCF=YES, DCX=10;
The number change index corresponds to number insertion processing: insert the
monthly rental service access code 201 before the called number.
2) Prefix data
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-118
PPS is triggered through access code, therefore, it is necessary to configure the
corresponding prefix data. For monthly rental service, the service type should be set
as basic service, and the service attribute should be set as PPS. For example,
ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'201, CSTP=BASE, CSA=PPSSVR, MINL=3, MAXL=24,
CHSC=10;
The monthly rental service is trigger by access code plus called number, therefore,
the data for prefix processing (number deletion and reanalysis) should be configured:
ADD PFXPRO: PFX=K'201, CSC=10, DDC=YES, DDCX=20, RAF=YES;
Number change index 20 corresponds to number deletion, and reanalysis will be
carried out after prefix 201 is deleted.
3) Billing control data
Besides the data configuration for normal switch (note that PPS does not support
premium currently due to limited budget), the billing data for controlling conversation
duration (the minimum and maximum conversation duration for PPS subscribers) can
be set upon subscribers' demand.
For example,
ADD TCTRL: CGR=10, CHSC=20, TIME=60, FLAG=YES, ALMT=60;
The data indicates that the maximum conversation duration for a PPS subscriber to
call a certain prefix is 10 hours. If the duration exceeds 10 hours, the call will be
disconnected, but an alarm will be given 1 minute before the disconnection. In
addition, the alarm for reporting the duration can control the minimum balance for
PPS calls, and the balance should be enough for the alarm call; otherwise, the alarm
call will not be provided.
4) Caller discrimination data
Because the calling number is used as a key field for query, calling numbers must be
provided for the binding PPS calls, and the calling authentication data should be
configured if a subscriber is accessed from other offices. For example,
ADD CLRDSG: DSP=10, CLI=K'0755654, DAI=NDN, FUNC=ATT, CHG=10;
The data indicates that the discrimination group is 10, the prefix of the calling number
is 0755654, the address attribute is calling attribute conversion for a domestic call,
and the billing source of the caller is modified to 10. The data is useful when a trunk
can access subscribers of different areas. At this time, the billing source of the callers
will not use the billing source codes on the trunk group, and the callers can be located
precisely.
ADD N7TG: TG=10, G=IN, SRC=10, NIF=YES, NICF=NO, ISCLR=TRUE;
ADD TGDSG: TG=10, CCAT=254, DSG=10;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-119
Then, set the trunk group data for the quotation of the corresponding discrimination
group data, and process the calling number request.
5) ISP data configuration
Besides the hardware data of ISP, the function items of ISP should also be configured
on the switch, so as to let the host know which board should be queried for a data.
ADD ISPFUNC: FCF=BILL, BG=1;
In the above data, ISP group 1 is configured to store PPS data.
Switch data configuration for PPS in card mode
For PPS in card mode, the system adds a module to simulate SCP for the control,
and other processing employs the IN flow. Therefore, apart form the basic data
configuration, the card service also requires the configuration of part of IN data.
1) Prefix data
The card service is triggered by access code, the corresponding prefix data should be
configured as follows: service type to IN service, and service attribute to PPS.
ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'200, CSTP=IN, CSA=PPSSVR, MINL=3, MAXL=3,
CHSC=65535;
2) Billing control data
The same data configuration as the above PPS by month.
3) Caller discrimination data
If the subscribers of other offices can make card calls, the caller discrimination data
should be configured.
4) Card service configuration table data
In view of flexibility, some parameters in the card service can be set. For example,
SET PPSCFG: SKEY=PPSKEY, MAXC=12, MINC=6, MAXP=6, MINP=4, LANG1=K'0,
LANG2=K'1, DEFLI=1, QUYB=K'11, MODP=K'22, TANB=K'33, SETC=K'44,
CANC=K'55, PROB=YES, PROA=YES, CHOP=YES;
The maximum & minimum length for a card number is set to 12 and 6 respectively;
the maximum & minimum length for a password is set to 6 and 4 respectively;
language selection code 1 is set to 0, and language selection code 2 is set to 1; the
default language index is set to 0; the password query and modification selection
code is set to 11 and 22 respectively; the balance transfer selection code is set to 33;
card number bound selection code is set to 44, and the selection code for canceling
card number bound is set to 55; The balance will be prompted before/after the
conversation and language selection is provided. When configuring data for multiple
languages, note that the language selection code N corresponds to the language
index N.
5) IN DP data
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-120
ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, CODE=K'200, SKEY=200, RNFLG=REQ;
ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'200, LEN=3;
Configure the IN access code corresponding to prefix 200 and trigger DP data to
activate IN flow.
6) IN multi-language supporting data
ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;
The above data indicates the language code corresponding to language index 1 is 64
(play in English).
7) Software parameter
The system cannot support the card service in ISP mode and IN service at the same
time, therefore, a software parameter is added for distinguish these two services:
MOD SFP: ID=P127, VAL="0xefff";
The above data indicates to support the card service in ISP mode.
8) Billing data
In case of configuring the PPS billing data, note to specify a separate billing source
for PPS subscribers to facilitate separate billing. Currently, PPS is changed when the
callee answers the call, therefore, the data at the billing point has no impact on PPS.
In addition, note that the current PPS system does not support premium, which will
not calculated even if the actual calculation is set.
PPS data
The PPS system data comprises switch configuration data, service data, PPS control
data and PPS data. The first several kinds of data are set to the foreground SPC or
Main Processor Unit (MPU) database via Back Administration Module (BAM), and the
latter one is directly set to the database in ISP via service server. The service server
communicates with ISP via Ethernet, and its Internet Protocol (IP) address is fixed to
172.20.200.199. The ISP already configured with PPS should also set on the service
server to inform it of the communication party.
The PPS data configured by the service server is as follows:
1) Setting the location of ISP
The ISP location of the PPS function item should be set on the service server to
facilitate the correct communication between them.
[Command]: SET ISP
[Example]:
SET ISP: MF=1, MS=9, SF=1, SS=10;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-121
The active ISP is set to slot 9 of frame 1, and the standby ISP is set to slot 10 of
frame 1.
2) Card distribution command
This command is for setting PPS account and balance. Because it is hard to carry out
fast random query of a card number in the database of the switch in the condition that
the capacity is used as little as possible, the system distributes card numbers based
on subscriber data. In order to implement disperse distribution of cards for the
subscribers bound, the system carries out the special processing of activation and
deactivation. Card distribution involves commands such as card number segment
distribution, card number activation.
a) Card number segment distribution in card mode
PPS in card mode is different from PPS by month in card mode: using different
commands. The random distribution of cards in the data of PPS in card mode is
actually to set an activation rate within a number segment, and the system will
generate the corresponding quantity of card numbers within the number segment
based on this activation rate.
[Command]:DST CARD
[Example]:
DST CARD: TP=RC, SC=K'7553211000, EC=K'7553211100, SY=2002, SM=AUG,
SD=1, VP=24, PB=100, RL=500, EF="pps.crd", MB=3, EY=2004, EM=AUG, ED=1,
PL=4;
B-category card number segment setting: the starting number is 7553211000; the
ending number is 7553211100; the preset amount is 100; the upper limit for money
recharge is 500; the card number distribution date is Aug. 1, 2002; the valid period of
card number segment is 24 months; the expiry date of the card number is Aug. 1,
2004; the password is 4 bits (6 bits by default), and is generated randomly. A file
"pps.crd" for storing card number data is generated when a card number is distributed.
The path for storing card number data can be specified in 128BAM.INI in the service
server, and the default card number file is named as "current date _sequence
number.crd", for example, the card number file firstly distributed on July 22, 2002 is
named as "20020722_1.crd".
b) Distribution card number segment for monthly rental subscribers
[Command]: SET MTHST
[Example]:
SET MTHST: SC=K'6540000, EC=K'6540999, PB=50, RL=2000, AR=NO;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-122
Monthly rental subscriber segment setting: the starting card number is 6540000; the
ending card number is 6540999; the preset sum is 50 yuan; the upper limit for money
recharge is 2000 yuan; the card numbers within the card number segment are not
activated (note that when PPS subscribers and ordinary subscribers within the
number segment are mixed together, the following command RES CARD will be
used).
Note: The accounts of monthly rental subscribers are based on their actual phone
numbers, therefore, account and number should be corresponded during data
configuration.
c) Activation and deactivation of monthly rental subscribers
[Command]: RES CARD
[Example]:
RES CARD: SN=K'6540000, EN=K'6540011, RT=STA, CS=ACT;
Activate the card numbers from 6540000 to 6540011.
RES CARD: SN=K'6540000, EN=K'6540011, RT=STA, CS=DEA;
Deactivate the card numbers from 6540000 to 6540011.
d) Modification of caller attributes
[Command]: MOD CLRATTR
[Example]:
MOD CLRATTR: SN=K'7540000, EN=K'7540011, CBG=2, CHSC=10, RTSC=10;
Modify the call barring group number for 7540000 - 7540011 to 2, the billing source
code to 10, and routing code to 10.
e) Import of card number data file
[Command]: IMP CARD
[Example]:
IMP CARD: IF="d:\card\20020117. crd";
Card number generation by card manufacturer is also supported for card distribution:
the manufacturer provides the card number file to the carrier, then the carrier can
import the PPS data stored in file format into the system using this command.
Currently, the system only supports to import the card number files of rechargeable
cards and sum-limited cards.
The format for card number file is:
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-123
####CardSegment
6680000 6680010 2 500 500 020701 6 3
####CardNumber
6680000 248210 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680001 958521 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680002 208872 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680003 916043 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680004 426694 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680005 937545 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680006 000406 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680007 939527 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680008 967168 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680009 588399 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680010 106740 500 021201 65535 255 65535
####End
CardSegment format is:
starting card number ending card number card type preset sum
limited sum for recharge distribution date valid period of card number
segment times of black card
card type value =1, rechargeable card; card type value =2, sum-limited card;
CardNumber format is:
card number password sum expiry date of card number call barring group
number routing source code
In case of card number file generated by card manufacturer, the manufacturer need
not consider the call barring group number, billing source code and routing source
code, which are filled as 65535, 255, 65535 respectively. After the carrier imports the
card number file, he/she can modify these three codes by command MOD CLRATTR.
Each field of these two parts must be input according to the format; otherwise, the
information "file format error" will be reported.
Other commands, such as CHK CARD, RCH CARD, DSP CARD, LST CARD, will not
be described here.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-124
f) Timing task
In the next version, there are four timing tasks by default:
BKP CARD: executed at 1:30 a.m.
BKP SERV: executed at 2:30 a.m.
FMT: executed at 3:30 a.m.
STR CRC executed at 4:30 a.m.
Due to the frequent sum change of PPS subscribers, it will make a big impact on the
service server if the updated sum is continuously written back into the database by
real-time backup of card number data. Therefore, timing backup (incremental backup)
of card number data is adopted now.
After the card number data and database are backed up, the newest data is only
written into the database, but not formatted into a data file in which the data is still not
updated. In order to prevent reloading ISP data file after the switch reset, the
database must be formatted periodically. The system will format the database at 3:30
a.m. by default.
The interval for executing BKP CARD and FMT within one day should be as short as
possible. In heavy-traffic hours, do not execute BKP CARD as possible. Before
executing FMT, BKP CARD should executed first to ensure the newest card number
data.

Note:
Monthly rental subscribers, card number bound subscribers and authentication subscribers are all
subscriber-related services, and the operations should be carried out on the phone set registered
with the corresponding service.
Budget and call monitoring are not provided for authentication subscribers (two-stage dialing
subscribers).
A subscriber can bind the card number or cancel it through a phone set, and cancel the card number
bound service through the service server command.
The following software parameter controls whether an authentication subscriber sends an answer
signal before the callee answers the call: OVS_CCB_PARA3
BIT7: corresponding to software parameter IPSECON_SEND_ALERT (OVS_CCB_PARA3_BIT7) used
to determine whether CONNECT or ALERTING messages is returned to the office where the caller is
located in case of false connections in the IN authentication service.
1: return ALERTING message (by default)
0: return CONNECT message

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-125
3.63 PPS Feature on Standalone Offices
The PPS is available in three forms, namely, standard-IN-form PPS, built-in PPS in
the multi-SM switch, and PPS in the standalone switch. These three forms achieve
the same functions but in different manners.
This manual covers only the switch-form PPS and offers no description of the
standard-IN-form PPS.
The standard-IN-form PPS is available only in the standard IN architecture. It features
flexible service provision and supports card number roaming. It is applicable to the
offices that have 1,000,000 service subscribers or more.
The built-in PPS in the multi-SM switch is provided by the ISP board and PPS server.
It is applicable to the offices that have a maximum of 500,000 service subscribers.
Currently, it does not support the card number roaming function. It can be applied in
the SPM networking and traditional SM networking scenarios.
The PPS in the standalone switch is provided by the ISP board and built-in PPS
server (sharing the same server with the BAM) (external PPS server cannot be used).
It is applicable to the offices that have a maximum of 100,000 service subscribers.
The MPU board must be the 128-MB CB34MPU board. It also requires a centralized
dual-tone number-receiving frame.
The following table lists the differences between the forms of the PPS.
Form Structure Service Application
Switch-form PPS
(multi-SM switch
or standalone
switch)
It consists of a switch and a
PPS server. The PPS
server only stores card
numbers and sums and
does not participate in the
call process.
It supports phone binding PPS,
long-distance card number
PPS, IPP, and Internet access
PPS. It features high stability,
high call processing efficiency,
easy maintenance, low cost,
and relatively fixed service
procedure.
It is suitable for
the offices that
have a small or
medium
subscriber
capacity.
Standard-IN-form
PPS
It is in a standard
architecture and consists of
SSP, SCP, SMP, SCE, and
SAU. The SSP is for
service switching, the SCP
is for service control, the
SMP is for service
management, the SCE is
for service creation, and the
SAU is for interconnection
with the SSP. The SAU is
the signaling access unit of
the SCP.
It supports all service functions
that conform to CS1 and CS2
standards, such as card
number service, called
charging, VPN, and AD. It
features relatively flexible
service procedure and high
cost.
It is suitable for
deployment of
large-capacity
PPS, integrated
IN service, and
whole-network
IN service.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-126
I. Meaning
This service has the same meaning as the PPS described earlier and is applicable to
low-capacity carriers.
This service uses the 128-MB CB34MPU board and SM host software. There should
be an expansion data area to separately store PPS data. It also entails the build-in
PPS server, that is, install the PPS server and BAM on the same server.
II. Setting conditions
The following describes only the PPS-related data configuration. In practice, set
parameters in accordance with actual situations.
Configuring system data
Configuration of system data aims at running the switch normally. System data is the
basic data.
1) Adding the IN centralized number-receiving frame
ADD BDIN: MN=1, F=4, LN=0, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=0, N1=12, N2=13, N3=14,
N4=15, HW1=4, HW2=6, HW3=8, HW4=10, BV=CQ02;
BV stands for the SPT version and set it to "CQ02". NODs and HW numbers should
be consistent with the actual physical wiring.
2) Loading PPS data
LAD PPSDATA: MN=1;

Note:
After restart, the host will load the PPS data automatically. However, if the loading fails or the maximum
number of tuples of the PPS data table changes due to inexistence of data or too many data to be
loaded, carry out the LAD PPSDATA command to reload the PPS data.

Configuring resource data
3) Language index data
Configure the language index "10" which is used by the first voice announcement.
Generally, it is also necessary to carry out the SET PPSCFG command to configure
the default language index.
ADD INLNG: LI=10, LT1=64, LT2=20;
ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-127
The first command indicates that the switch will play the voice announcement with the
language index 10 first in English (0X40) and then in Spanish (0x14). The second
command indicates that the switch will play the voice announcement with the
language index 1 only in English.
4) Currency index data
ADD CURIDX: LNG=64, CUR=1, UNT1="00000135", UNTS1="00000136",
UNT3="00000137", UNTS3="00000138";
The command indicates that the switch will play the data whose currency index is "1"
in English (0x40). The switch will adopt the basic voice announcement "00000135" to
play the singular main currency and the voice announcement "00000136" to play the
plural main currency. It will not play the fractional currency 1. It will adopt the voice
announcement "00000137" to play the singular fractional currency 2 and the voice
announcement "00000138" to play the plural fractional currency 2.

Note:
The card service of the ISP mode doesnt support multiple currencies, so the currency index is always
"1".

Configuring service data
Configuration of service data is crucial to the running of the PPS.
5) PPS in the monthly lease mode
a) Call source data
Add a call source for all monthly lease subscribers and configure number preparation
data. Thus, the switch will insert the access code of the monthly lease service before
the called number after a subscriber dials a number.
ADD CALLSRC: CSC=10, DCF=YES, DCX=10;
The number change index corresponds to "insert number". The switch will insert the
access code of the monthly lease service before the called number.
b) Prefix data
The pre-paid service is triggered by an access code, and the corresponding prefix
should be configured. For the monthly lease service, set the [SERVICE CATEGORY]
parameter to "basic service" and the [SERVICE ATTRIBUTE] parameter to "prepaid
service".
ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'201, CSTP=BASE, CSA=PPSSVR, MINL=3, MAXL=24,
CHSC=10;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-128
Because the monthly lease service is triggered by the access code plus called
number, it is necessary to add a piece of special prefix processing data (deleting
numbers and analyzing again).
ADD PFXPRO: PFX=K'201, CSC=10, DDC=YES, DDCX=20, RAF=YES;
The number change index 20 corresponds to the number deletion. The switch will
reanalyze the number after the deletion of the prefix 201.
c) Charging control data
For the PPS charging data, besides the switch data configuration (due to budget
difficulties, the current PPS does not support surcharge), you can configure data to
control conversation time, which controls the minimum and maximum conversation
time of PPS subscribers.
ADD TCTRL: CGR=10, CHSC=20, TIME=600, FLAG=YES, ALMT=60;
In the example, the maximum conversation time for a PPS subscriber is 10 hours,
that is, the switch will disconnect a call when its duration exceeds 10 hours. The
switch will also report an alarm one minute before the disconnection, which can not
only alert the subscriber, but also control the minimum balance for a PPS call. That is
to say, the balance in the card should be enough for the duration that the advance
alarm is set. Otherwise, the switch will reject the call.
d) Caller discrimination data
Configure the caller discrimination data in the case that the switch accesses the
subscribers from other offices.
ADD CLRDSG: DSP=10, CLI=K'0755654, DAI=NDN, FUNC=ATT, CHG=10;
The above data is to change the caller attribute for the national calls in the caller
discrimination group 10 and with the caller number prefix as 0755654. That is, change
the caller charging source code to 10. The data is useful when a trunk accesses
subscribers of different areas. In this case, the caller charging source code wont be
that of the trunk group, and the switch can accurately locate a caller.
ADD N7TG: TG=10, G=IN, SRC=10, NIF=YES, NICF=NO, ISCLR=TRUE;
ADD TGDSG: TG=10, CCAT=254, DSG=10;
Then configure the trunk group data to reference the corresponding discrimination
group data, and configure the data for requesting the caller number.
6) PPS in the card mode
a) Prefix data
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-129
Card calls are triggered by the access code. Set the [SERVICE CATEGORY]
parameter to "intelligent service" and the [SERVICE ATTRIBUTE] parameter to
"prepaid service".
ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'200, CSTP=IN, CSA=PPSSVR, MINL=3, MAXL=3,
CHSC=65535;
b) Charging control data
Configure it in the same way as that of the PPS in the monthly lease mode.
c) Caller discrimination data
If subscribers of other offices can originate card calls, it is necessary to configure
caller discrimination data.
d) Data of the card service configuration table
For flexibility, set some of the card service parameters.
SET PPSCFG: SKEY=PPSKEY, MAXC=12, MINC=6, MAXP=6, MINP=4, LANG1=K'0,
LANG2=K'1, DEFLI=1, QUYB=K'11, MODP=K'22, TANB=K'33, SETC=K'44,
CANC=K'55, PROB=YES, PROA=YES, CHOP=YES;
In the above example, the maximum length of card number is set to 12 and the
minimum length is set to 6; the maximum length of password is set to 6 and the
minimum length is set to 4; the language selection code 1 is set to 0 and the
language selection code 2 is set to 1; the query balance selection code is set to 11;
the modify password selection code is set to 22; the transfer balance selection code
is set to 33; the set card selection code is set to 44; the cancel card selection code is
set to 55; the "prompt balance before call" flag is set to "yes"; the "prompt balance
after call" flag is set to "yes"; the "if select language" flag is set to "yes".
e) DP data for the IN service
ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'200, LEN=3;
ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, CODE=K'200, SKEY=200, RNFLG=REQ;
Configure the intelligent access code corresponding to the prefix "200", and DP
trigger data to trigger the intelligent service.
f) Resource capability
The resource data refers to the data that the card service requires.
ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=200, MN=255;
SSP specialized capability specifies the modules that can provide resources for a
specific service. The module number ranges from 0 to 255. When it is 255, it indicates
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-130
that all modules can provide resources for the service. In the above example, all
modules have the resource capability for the PPS whose service key is 200.
g) Intelligent multiple-language support data
ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;
The data indicates that the language code corresponding to the language index 1 is
64, and the switch will play voice announcements in English.
h) Software parameter
The switch doesnt support the card service of the ISP mode and intelligent network
service simultaneously. Therefore, one parameter is added for distinguishing them:
MOD SFP: ID=P127, VAL="0xefff";
It means that the switch supports the card service of the ISP mode.
Configuring charging data
When configuring PPS charging data, add a separate charging source code for PPS
subscribers to facilitate separate charging. Currently, the switch starts to charge a call
when the called party answers. Therefore, the charging point data imposes no impact
on the PPS. In addition, surcharge is not supported by the PPS system. Even if it has
been set, it wont be involved in calculation.
Configuring PPS data
It is necessary to configure such data for each PPS subscriber as PPS account and
balance on the PPS server.
7) Distributing card number segment for card users
For the PPS data of the card mode, random card distribution means to set an
activation rate within a number segment, and the system will generate the
corresponding quantity of card numbers based on this activation rate within the
number segment.
DST CARD: TP=RC, SC=K'7553211000, EC=K'7553211100, SY=2002, SM=AUG,
SD=1, VP=24, PB=100, RL=500, EF="pps.crd", MB=3, EY=2004, EM=AUG, ED=1,
PL=4;
The command distributes type-B card numbers. The start number is 7553211000; the
end number is 7553211100; the preset sum is 100; the upper limit for money recharge
is 500; the card number distribution date is Aug. 1, 2002; the valid period of card
number segment is 24 months; the expiry date of the card number is Aug. 1, 2004;
the password is 4 digits (6 digits by default), and is generated randomly. The switch
generates the file "pps.crd" for storing card number data during card distribution.
Specify the path for storing card number data in 128BAM.INI on the service server.
The default name of the card number file is "current date_sequence number.crd". For
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-131
example, the name of the card number file firstly distributed on July 22, 2002 is
named as "20020722_1.crd".
8) Distributing card number segment for monthly lease subscribers
SET MTHST: SC=K'6540000, EC=K'6540999, PB=50, RL=2000, AR=NO;
The command distributes card numbers for monthly lease subscriber. The start card
number is 6540000; the end card number is 6540999; the preset sum is 50; the upper
limit for money recharge is 2000; the card numbers within the card number segment
are not activated (note that when PPS subscribers and ordinary subscribers are
within the same number segment, carry out the RES CARD command).

Note:
The accounts of monthly lease subscribers are based on their phone numbers actually. Therefore,
account and number should correspond to each other during data configuration.

9) Activating and deactivating monthly lease subscribers
RES CARD: SN=K'6540000, EN=K'6540011, RT=STA, CS=ACT;
Activate the card numbers from 6540000 to 6540011.
RES CARD: SN=K'6540000, EN=K'6540011, RT=STA, CS=DEA;
Deactivate the card numbers from 6540000 to 6540011.
10) Modifying caller attributes
MOD CLRATTR: SN=K'7540000, EN=K'7540011, CBG=2, CHSC=10, RTSC=10;
Modify the call restriction group number for 75400007540011 to 2, the charging
source code to 10, and route selection code to 10.
11) Importing card number data file
IMP CARD: IF="d:\card\20020117. crd";
A card manufacturer can also generate card numbers and hand the card number file
over to the carrier. The carrier carry out the IMP CARD command to import the PPS
data stored in the file into the system.
Presently, the switch can only import the card number files for rechargeable cards
and sum-limited cards.
The format of the card number file is as follows:
####CardSegment
6680000 6680010 2 500 500 020701 6 3
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-132
####CardNumber
6680000 248210 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680001 958521 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680002 208872 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680003 916043 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680004 426694 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680005 937545 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680006 000406 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680007 939527 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680008 967168 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680009 588399 500 021201 65535 255 65535
6680010 106740 500 021201 65535 255 65535
####End
The format of CardSegment:
start card number end card number card type preset sum recharge limit
distribution date validity period times of black card
card type value = 1, rechargeable card; card type value = 2, sum-limited card;
The format of CardNumber:
card number password sum expiry date call restriction group number
charging source code route selection source code
If the card manufacturer generates the card number file, he need not consider the call
restriction group number, charging source code, and route selection source code,
which are filled as 65535, 255, 65535 respectively. After the carrier imports the card
number file, he will carry out the MOD CLRATTR command to modify the three
parameters. Fill the parameters in the specified format. Otherwise, the switch will
report the message "file format error".
12) Formatting PPS data
FMT PPS:;
The FMT command formats DATAMAN database, while the FMT PPS command
formats the CARD database.
13) Backing up PPS data (to the background)
BKP SERV: MD=NORMAL, SID=ISP;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-133
Back up PPS data newly modified (only back up modified data).
BKP SERV: MD=ALL, SID=ISP;
Back up PPS data completely (back up all the data).
14) Starting CRC for PPS data
STR PPSCRC: MN=1;
The STR CRC command implements CRC on the data in the static data area, while
the STR PPSCRC command implements CRC on the data in the expansion data
area.
15) Sending data of one table or one record in the expansion data area
SND PPSSPD: MN=1, TID=TID497;
The SND SPD command sends the data in the static data area, while the SND
PPSSPD command sends the data in the expansion data area.
The table IDs in the PPS data:
497: PPS card number segment table
498: PPS card number index table
16) Sending the unsuccessfully sent PPS data
SND PPSUSD: MN=1;
The SND USD command sends the data in the static data area, while the SND
PPSUSD command sends the data in the expansion data area.
17) PPS-related scheduled tasks
BKP SERV carried out at 1:30 a.m.
BKP PPSDB carried out at 3:00 a.m.
FMT PPS carried out at 4:00 a.m.
STR PPSCRC carried out at 5:00 a.m.
The switch backs up PPS card number data at specified intervals in the incremental
backup mode.
After the card number data and database are backed up, the newest data is only
written into the database, but not formatted into new data file, and the data in the
existing data file is still not updated. In order to prevent from reloading ISP data file
after the switch reset, the database must be formatted periodically. The system will
format the PPS database at 4:00 a.m. by default. By this means, loss can be limited
to the least degree in the case of abnormities (such as switch reset, ISP reset).
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-134
The interval between carrying out BKP SERV and FMT PPS within a day should be
as short as possible. In heavy-traffic hours, do not carry out BKP SERV as possible.
Before carrying out FMT PPS, carry out BKP SERV first to ensure the newest card
number data.
3.64 Preselection Service
I. Meaning
Preselection service can perform special processing of a call according to the
specified caller number, called prefix and current time. It has four functions currently,
namely call rejection, preselection, caller attribute modification, and preselection &
caller attribute modification. Call rejection function is for releasing a call directly;
preselection is for inserting an access code before the existing called number; caller
attribute modification is for modifying the caller routing source code, failure source
code, caller billing source code, caller call barring group number of the call, as well as
caller number and called number; preselection & caller attribute modification is an
integration of the above two functions. This service, providing multiple functions with
flexible usage, can meet various service requirements related to number change,
routing, call barring and billing during a call.
II. Setting conditions
The switch must be configured with ISP board.
III. Operation
The operator can use the command ADD CNACLR to add the data for a single
subscriber, and the command ADB CNACLR to add the data for a batch of
subscribers.
IV. Example
If it is required to insert an access code prefix 191 before the called number for
routing and to modify the billing source code to 1 when a subscriber whose number
starts with 666 calls a prefix 010 on 25
th
, December, the data setting procedures are
as follows:
First define the time index, for example, define the time index for 25
th
, Dec. to 1.
ADD TMIDX: TMX=1, TYPE=CLRA, IDXT=MIDX, MONTH=DEC, DAY=25,
HOUR=24;
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-135
In order to insert an access code before the called number, it is necessary to add
preselection access code first, and then specify an access code corresponding to the
access code index:
ADD PRECODE: IDX=1, ACD=K'191, CN="China Tele";
Finally add Preselection data:
ADD CNACLR: PFX=K'010, CID=K'666, TMIDX=0, FUNC=PAM, RCHS=1, PACC=1,
RANA=YES;

Note:
Time index setting includes date setting and weekday setting. Time index can be precise to one hour.
For table searching, the system can match the time index value corresponding to the minimum time
point that is later than the current system time. If a time index for a certain time can be found
according to the weekday, but another index can be found according to the date, the latter one
should be taken as reference.
There are 7 default time indices during system initialization: 24:00:00 from Sunday to Saturday. It is
recommended not to delete these indices, in case that the corresponding time indices cannot be
found for some time points. When the time index for a certain time point cannot be found, the system
will use the default value 0. Therefore, index 0 should be taken as the default value as possible
during preselection data setting.
If the function of preselection & modify caller attribute is selected, both called number change and
preselection can be accomplished. In case of inserting an access code before the called number, the
called number should be converted first. If the caller number is converted, the original caller number
should be used for querying the corresponding caller number analysis data.
When the query of preselection data by the system fails or times out, BIT4 of the overseas CCB
testing parameter 1 will determine whether to release this call: if it is 1, the call will not be released; if
it is 0, the call will be released.
Reanalysis means that the system reanalyzes the new called number (generally being converted),
then the services related to the original called prefix will be redone based on the new called prefix,
such as routing, billing selection, prefix service attribute, supplementary signaling analysis,
preselection, special processing of called number initials, etc. Therefore, you should be cautious for
whether to select this flag. If preselection is to be done, reanalysis flag should be selected after the
access code is inserted before the called number; while the flag is unnecessary to be selected in
case of modifying caller attribute.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-136
3.65 Priority Subscriber
I. Meaning
If a priority subscriber is in one of the 32-channel frames, the reserved timeslots for
this subscriber can be used to ensure the connection when the traffic is heavy.
II. Setting conditions
Null.
III. Operation
The operator uses the command MOD ST to modify subscriber type to priority
subscriber.
IV. Example
Use the command MOD ST to modify subscriber type to priority subscriber.
3.66 Prompt of Incoming Call
I. Meaning
This service is to prompt the subscriber in conversation that there is a national or
international toll call in waiting.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "prompt of incoming call" authority (you can use the command
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A, B and C are ordinary subscribers. Subscriber A has the "prompt of incoming call"
authority. Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber C.
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A Subscribers B & A hear the prompt tone
Subscriber A has the call waiting
operation authority
Refer to "call waiting" service for specific operation
process
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-137
2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
A Service subscriber with the "prompt of incoming call" authority, whose number
is 8883080
B Ordianry subscriber, whose number is 8883010
C Ordianry subscriber, whose number is 8883020
Suppose Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber C, the operation process is as
follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials 8883080 SubscribersB & A hear the prompt tone
Subscriber A presses the
hook and then dials "1"
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and Subscriber C hears the
busy tone
Subscriber A presses the
hook and then dials "2"
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and Subscriber C hears the
music and holds on
Subscriber A does not act,
90 seconds later
Subscriber B hears the busy tone, and Subscriber A continues to talk
with Subscriber C

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
If a subscriber is registered with call waiting service as well as incoming call prompt service, or the
caller is registered with outgoing call prompt service, the incoming call prompt for the callee will not
function. Nevertheless, the prompt tone of the subscriber is decided jointly by bit 9 of the CCB
internal parameter 3 and bit 9 &10 of the F150 service parameter.
Bit 9 of the CCB internal parameter 3 controls whether incoming call prompt functions or not (1 for
function; 0 for not function). Bit 10 of the F150 service parameter controls whether only toll calls are
prompted (1 for prompting national/international toll calls; 0 for prompting all incoming calls).
Bit 9 of the F150 service parameter controls the prompt tone of incoming toll calls (1 for incoming toll
call tone; 0 for ordinary call waiting tone).

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-138
3.67 Prompt of Number Change
I. Meaning
If a subscriber number has been changed, when other subscribers call the subscriber,
a prompt for number change will be played to the caller, even the new number will be
informed if necessary.
II. Setting conditions
Subscriber A's number has been changed. When there is an incoming call from other
subscriber, it is only necessary to give a prompt that the number has been changed.
Use command MOD ST for the setting.
Subscriber A's number has been changed. When there is an incoming call from other
subscriber, both the number change information and the new number should be
prompted: use command MOD ST to set the state of Subscriber A to number changed
state; use command ADD CHGDN to set Subscriber A's new number; use command
ADD CFPRO to configure data for failure processing (number change announcement
is played); in addition, use command ADD SIGSET to set the tone in No. 90 channel
to synchronous tone.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Ordinary subscriber who has changed the number
B Ordinary subscriber
Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A Subscriber B hears the prompt tone

Set a new number for Subscriber A, set failure processing for number change, and
set No. 90 tone to synchronous tone.
Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A
Subscriber B hears the prompt tone for the number
change and the new number

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-139
IV. Example
Suppose:
Subscriber A (77700001) to number change state: MOD ST: D=K'7770001,
DNS=CHG;
Ordinary Subscriber B (77700000)
Ordinary number change announcement
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A Subscriber B hears the prompt tone for number change

Set the new number of Subscriber A to 6540001: ADD CHGDN: ODN=K'7770001,
NDN=K'6540001;
Set failure processing data for number change: ADD CFPRO: PFX=K'777, FCC=DNC,
FSC=255, RUT=ALL, CSA=ALLSRVC, FPT=SIG, TT=ST36;
Set signal tone 90 to synchronous tone:
State of SM: MOD SIGSET: IDX=90, METHOD=SM, SSTSM=SYN;
State of SPM: MOD SIGSET: IDX=90, METHOD=SPM, SSTSPM=SYN;
Number change announcement reporting new number
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B calls
Subscriber A
Subscriber B hears the prompt tone for number change, for example,
"The number you dialed has been changed. The new number is 6540001"

Note:
Signal tone 36 is the ordinary number change announcement. Signal tone 90 is the number change
announcement reporting new number. Separate tone recording is necessary.
For the SM, the CB02SIG board is required. Therefore, when multiple subscribers activate this
service simultaneously, only one subscriber can hear the announcement reporting new number due
to resource limit.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-140
3.68 Prompt of Outgoing Call
I. Meaning
This service is also called "caller controlled call waiting" service. When a subscriber
registered with this service makes a call, the callee will hear a voice prompt for the
incoming call during the conversation with another subscriber even if the callee has
no authority for call waiting service.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "prompt of outgoing call" authority (you can use the command
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A, B and C are ordinary subscribers. Subscriber A has the "prompt of outgoing call"
authority. Subscriber B is talking with Subscriber C.
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A calls Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber B hears the call waiting prompt tone
Subscriber B has the call waiting operation
authority
Refer to Call Waiting service for specific operation
process

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
A Service subscriber, whose number is 8883080, with the "prompt of outgoing
call" authority
B Callee, whose number is 8883010
C Ordinary subscriber
Suppose Subscriber B is talking with Subscriber C, the operation process is as
follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-141
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883010
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
Subscribe B hears the call waiting prompt tone
Subscriber B presses the hook and then dials "1"
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and
Subscriber C hears the busy tone
Subscriber B presses the hook and then dials "2"
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and
Subscriber C hears the music
Subscriber B takes no action, 90 seconds later
Subscriber A hears the busy tone, and
Subscriber B continues to talk with Subscriber
C

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service is used only within the local office, and it cannot prompt the higher-priority talks, such as
toll talks or operator-involved talks.
If a subscriber registered with this service calls another subscriber who is in conversation and has
registered call waiting service, priority is given to call waiting service.

3.69 Quick Access Function
I. Meaning
A short number (such as *14, *15, *16) can be set to stand for a long number. They
are unique numbers in an office.
II. Setting conditions
This service needs no registration or authority requirement. It can be used if only the
data are configured at the local office. Data configuration method is as follows:
Set a short number (such as *14) as the new service prefix of "Quick Access
Function" by command ADD CNACLD.
Add a number change index by command ADD DNC. The number change type
is "NUMBER CHANGED", and set the corresponding long number for the short
number.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-142
Set special processing of number initial for the short number (*14) by command
ADD PFXPRO, and convert the called number (the change index is the one set
at step 2), and then set "TRUE" for the reanalysis option.

Note:
For Centrex subscribers, outgoing prefix should be added before the long number during data
configuration.

III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
SN Short number
DN Long number corresponding to the short number, that is, the number of
Subscriber B
1) Service registration
Null.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials SN
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A hears the ring
back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscribers A and B talk with each other
Subscriber B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Null.
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber A is the service subscriber, and the short number *14
corresponds to the number of Subscriber B.
1) Service registration
Null.
2) Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-143
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *14
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A hears the ring
back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscribers A and B talk with each other
Subscriber B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Null.
3.70 Record
I. Meaning
This service enables the operator to record the voice announcement carried over
several designated timeslots.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.

Note:
This service is for operator only.

III. Operation
Suppose:
A Operator
MMM Module number
NNN Timeslots to be recorded; it can be only timeslot 0, 1, 34 or 35 (when the signal
tone board is CB01) or any timeslot except timeslot 9 (when the signal tone board is
CB02, and two CB02s are configured at the same time).
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-144
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*79*MMM*NNN#
After hearing the music for 3 seconds, Subscriber A can record
voice announcements carried by the designated timeslots
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
If Subscriber A is to record the timeslot 34, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*79*001*034#
After hearing the music for 3 seconds, Subscriber A can record
voice announcements carried by the designated timeslots
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
The maximum recording duration is 64 seconds.
This service cannot be applied on the pulse phone.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-145
3.71 Registration and Cancellation of CF Service
(CFU/CFNR/CFB)
I. Meaning
CF services (including CFU, CFNR and CFB) can be set or canceled either directly
on the local phone set, or on other remote phone set, which can facilitate subscribers
to register, modify or cancel forward-to numbers at any time in any place.
II. Setting conditions
Subscribers should have the corresponding CF authority. There is a limitation for
remote registration/cancellation: two phone sets must be connected to the same
switch. If it is required to implement remote registration/cancellation of CF services
between two offices, Remote Activate Call Forwarding (RACF) service and RACF
server must be used in tandem office.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber with CF authority
PQABCD Number of subscriber A
SSSS Outgoing call barring password of Subscriber A for CFU service
TN Forward-to number
B Subscriber using ordinary PSTN phone set
Registration and cancellation of CFU service
1) Local registration of CFU service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *57*TN#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Local cancellation of CFU service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, indicating A has registered
with CF service
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-146
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A dials #57#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful service
cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

3) Remote registration of CFU service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
*571*SSSS*PQABCD*TN#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service registration
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

4) Remote cancellation of CFU service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
#571*SSSS*PQABCD#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service cancellation
Subscriber B hangs up Service canceled

Registration and cancellation of CFB service
1) Local registration of CFB service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *40*TN#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Local cancellation of CFB service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, indicating A has
registered with CF service
Subscriber A dials #40#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

3) Remote registration of CFB service
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-147
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
*401*SSSS*PQABCD*TN#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service registration
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

4) Remote cancellation of CFB service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
#401*SSSS*PQABCD#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service cancellation
Subscriber B hangs up Service canceled

Registration and cancellation of CFNR service
1) Local registration of CFNR service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *41*TN#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Local cancellation of CFNR service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, indicating A has
registered with CF service
Subscriber A dials #41#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

3) Remote registration of CFNR service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
*411*SSSS*PQABCD*TN#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service registration
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-148
4) Remote cancellation of CFNR service
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
#411*SSSS*PQABCD#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
service cancellation
Subscriber B hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example
Please refer to the setting description in Operation.

Note:
If a subscriber has registered absent subscriber service or call back on busy service, he/she cannot
register any CF service (CFU/CFB/CFNR).
By default, CFU is superior to CFB, CFNR and CW. Service priority can be viewed and modified by
command LST PRIOR and MOD PRIOR.
The maximum subscriber number for CFU in each module is 100 by default, which can be modified
by command MOD MDU. MOD MDU does not support online setting, and the setting will be effective
after level-4 reset of the system.
To ensure successful CF service, subscribers should have outgoing call authority on registered
numbers.
The CF subscribers should have CF service authority and have no service conflict of CF. The conflict
service list can be viewed by command LST COMPTB, and service conflict relation can be modified
by command MOD COMPTB.
CFU has no impact on outgoing calls, but subscribers will hear the special dialing tone after hooking
off.

3.72 Registered Call
I. Meaning
When the callee is busy, your call is registered. When you make this call next time,
just lift the handset for more than 5 seconds, and the telephone will automatically dial
the callees number.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-149
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "registered call" authority (you can use the command ADD ST
or MOD ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Callee
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the telephone number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the busy tone
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *53# (on DTMF phone) or
153 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
5 seconds later
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and the
registration is then automatically cancelled
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
If Subscriber A wants to cancel this service within 20 minutes of registration, then:
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #53# (on DTMF phone) or
151153 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-150
Registered call will be cancelled automatically after 20 minutes from registration.
IV. Example
If Subscriber Bs number is 8883850 and he/she is busy, the operation process is as
follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850 Subscriber A hears the busy tone
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *53# (on DTMF phone) or
153 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
5 seconds later
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and the
registration is then automatically cancelled
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
If Subscriber A wants to cancel the service within 20 minutes of registration, then:
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #53# (on DTMF phone) or
151153 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-151
Note:
This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
This service is valid within twenty minutes after the registration.
If the subscriber originates another call within twenty minutes, the registration will be cancelled
automatically.

3.73 Remote Activation of the CFB Service
I. Meaning
The CFB can be set remotely so that all the calls to a subscriber will be forwarded to
another designated number when the subscriber is busy.
This service is only for Centrex subscribers.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CFB" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it). The service has been registered in command ADD CNACLD, and the
service attribute is "CFB".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Callee with the password of SSSS
B Remote service subscriber to whom the calls will be forwarded when
Subscriber A is busy
C, D Callers
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
*401*SSSS*As number*
transferred number#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-152
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials As
number
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Subscriber D dials As
number
Subscriber D hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber D

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
#401*SSSS*As number#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber As password (SSSS) is 1234, telephone number is 3850, and
Subscriber B's number is 3851, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
*401*1234*3850*3851#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 3850
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-153
Operation Expected result
Subscriber D dials 3850
Subscriber D hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber D

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
#401*1234*3850#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and remote activation of
the CFB service.
When remote activation of the CFB service and do-not-disturb service are registered, the
do-not-disturb service takes precedence.
When remote activation of the CFB service is applied for, the subscriber will not have the call waiting
function.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and remote activation of the CFB
service.
The remote activation of the CFU service takes precedence over the remote activation of the CFB
service.

3.74 Remote Activation of the CFNR Service
I. Meaning
The CFNR can be set remotely so that all the calls to a subscriber will be forwarded
to the designated number when no one answers the calls within a specified time
period.
This service is only for Centrex subscribers.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-154
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CFNR" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it). The service has been registered in the command ADD CNACLD,
and the service attribute is "CFNR".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Callee
B Remote service subscriber to whom the calls will be forwarded
C Caller
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials *411*SSSS*As
number*transferred numbe#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials As number
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber A does not answer the
call within the specified time
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
#411*SSSS*As number #
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-155
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber As password is 1234, telephone number is 3850, and Subscriber
B's number is 3851, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
*411*1234*3850*3851#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 3850
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber A does not answer the
call within the specified time
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
#411*1234*3850#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-156
Note:
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and remote activation of
the CFNR service.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy and remote activation of the CFNR
service.
When remote activation of the CFNR service and do-not-disturb service are registered, the
do-not-disturb service takes precedence.
When remote activation of the CFNR service is applied for, the subscriber will not have the call
waiting function.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and remote activation of the CFNR
service.
Remote activation of the CFU service takes precedence over remote activation of the CFNR service.

3.75 Remote Activation of the CFU Service
I. Meaning
The CFU can be set remotely so that all the calls to a subscriber will be forwarded to
another number unconditionally.
This service is only for Centrex subscribers.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "CFU" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it). The service has been registered in command ADD CNACLD, and the
service attribute is "CFU.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Callee with the password of SSSS
B Remote service subscriber to whom the calls will be forwarded
C Caller
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-157
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B dials
*571*SSSS*As
number*transferred number#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials As
number
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang
up
Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
#571*SSSS*As number#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber As number is 3850, Subscriber B's number is 3851, and
Subscriber As password (SSSS) is 1234, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
*571*1234*3850*3851#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-158
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C dials 3850
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang
up
Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
#571*1234*3850#
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and remote activation of
the CFU service.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy service and remote activation of
the CFU service.
When call forwarding service and do-not-disturb service are registered, the do-not-disturb service
takes precedence.
When the remote activation of the CFU service is applied for, the subscriber can not use the call
waiting function.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and remote activation of the CFU
service.
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.76 Secretary Service
I. Meaning
Designate a phone set as the secretary phone to receive all the calls to the manager.
Only the secretary can directly call the manager, and the calls from others to the
manager will go to secretary first.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-159
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "secretary service" authority (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber using a DTMF phone
C Caller
TN Telephone number of secretary B
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *77* TN#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials Subscriber
As number
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber B presses the
hook
Subscriber B hears special dialing tone and Subscriber C hears the
music
Subscriber B dials Subscriber
As number
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber B hangs up Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-160
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A dials #77#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber A's number is 8883851 and Subscriber B's number is 8883850,
the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*77*8883850#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883851
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber B presses the hook
Subscriber B hears the special dialing tone and Subscriber C
hears the music
Subscriber B dials 8883851
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber B hangs up Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #77#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-161
Note:
In this example, Subscriber A is the manager and Subscriber B is the secretary.
Priority is given to the secretary service if the call forwarding unconditional is also registered.
By default, priority is given to the secretary service other than the do-not-disturb, call forwarding busy
and call waiting services. Service priority setting can be viewed and modified by use of commands
LST PRI and MOD PRI.
This service is not applicable to pulse phone.
Bit 6 of the CCB internal parameter 4 decides whether the calls from the Centrex group are directly
connected to the manager or transferred by the secretary. If bit 6 is 1 (default value), all calls go to
the secretary first. If bit 6 is 0, calls from the Centrex group directly go to the manager.

3.77 Secretary Station Service
I. Meaning
The secretary station has the call queuing function as well as secretary function.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "secretary station service" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber using a DTMF phone
B, C Callers
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*78#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-162
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
Subscriber As number
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the ringing
tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials
Subscriber As number
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone
Subscribers A and B
hang up
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C
hang up
Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
#78#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
If Subscriber As number is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *78#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-163
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
8883850
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials
8883850
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone
Subscribers A and B hang
up
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang
up
Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #78#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
This service does not conflict with other the supplementary services.
By default, priority is given to the call forwarding unconditional, do-not-disturb, call forwarding busy
and call waiting services other than the secretary station service. Service priority setting can be
viewed and modified by use of commands LST PRI and MOD PRI.
This service is not applicable to pulse phone.

3.78 Single Call Multi-Display Service
I. Meaning
The phone sets with multi-display function can ring simultaneously when receiving a
call. If one subscriber picks up the phone, the other phone sets will stop ringing. The
calls are kept secret with Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) function.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-164
II. Setting condition
A group of subscribers have the "single call multi-display" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".
When setting Private Branch Exchange (PBX) group, the parameter "single call
multi-display" must be set to "TRUE".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Ordinary subscriber whose number is PQRABCD
B, C, D Ordinary subscribers within the same PBX group as Subscriber A
E Caller
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service application
Operation Expected result
Subscriber E hooks off Subscriber E hears the dialing tone
Subscriber E dials PQRABCD
Subscribers A, B, C and D ring simultaneously, and
Subscriber E hears the ring back tone
Subscriber A or B or C or D hooks
off
The one hooking off is in conversation with Subscriber E.
The other phones stop ringing.

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber As number is 8883850, Subscribers B, C and D are in the same
multi-display group as Subscriber A, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service application
Operation Expected result
Subscriber E hooks off Subscriber E hears the dialing tone
Subscriber E dials 8883850
Subscribers A, B, C and D ring simultaneously, and Subscriber
E hears the ring back tone.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-165
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A or B or C or D hook
off
The one hooking off is in conversation with Subscriber E. The
other phones stop ringing.

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
When a subscriber or a group of subscribers are busy, the incoming call will be held for a period of
time. Untill one of them is idle, he/she receives the call.
When the multi-display subscribers turn from busy to idle, the other subscribers within the group ring
simultaneously.

3.79 Telephone Set Self-Test
I. Meaning
This service is used for checking whether the phone set has faults.
II. Setting conditions
The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
PQABCD Number of Subscriber A
909 Phone set self-test service prefix
Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 909PQABCD
Subscriber A hears the voice prompt for reporting
his/her own number
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-166
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the music

IV. Example
Suppose the number of Subscriber A is 8880001, the phone set self-test service
prefix is 909, the minimum length of a number is 3 digits, and the maximum length is
10 digits.
Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 9098880001
Subscriber A hears the voice prompt for reporting
his/her own number 8880001
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the music

Note:
Only analog subscribers can use this service.
Bit 15 of call internal parameter 3 can control the type of the voice prompt that subscribers hear for
the first time after dialing the number.
1: hear his/her own number;
0: hear the music.

3.80 Temporary Booking CLIP and CLIR
I. Meaning
The caller can set through the service prefix to display or restrict the display of the
caller number. The subscribers are classified into three categories as follows:
1) Subscribers of category A: allowed to display the caller number to the callee, but
the caller number will not be displayed if restriction prefix is added to the callee
(with "CLIP" authority and "temporary booking CLIP" authority).
2) Subscribers of category B: not allowed to display the caller number to the callee,
but allowed to display the caller number to the callee if corresponding permission
prefix is added to the callee (with "CLIR authority" and "temporary booking CLIR"
authority).
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-167
3) Subscribers of category C: not allowed to display the caller number to the callee,
even if they dial the permission prefix before the callee number (with "permanent
booking CLIR" authority).
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "temporary booking CLIP or CLIR" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber whose number is ABCDEF
B Callee whose number is PQRLMN
Subscriber A belongs to category A.
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials PQRLMN
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays ABCDEF
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*62PQRLMN
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Subscriber A belongs to category B.
4) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-168
5) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials PQRLMN
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*68PQRLMN
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays ABCDEF
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

6) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Subscriber A belongs to category C.
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials PQRLMN
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*68PQRLMN
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-169
3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose Subscriber As number is 8883850, and Subscriber Bs number is 8883851.
Subscriber A belongs to category A.
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883851
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "8883850"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*628883851
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Subscriber A belongs to category B.
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883851
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-170
Operation Expected result
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*688883851
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "8883850"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Subscriber A belongs to category C.
4) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
5) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883851
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang
up
Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*688883851
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone.
Subscriber Bs telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang
up
Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

6) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-171
Note:
When MCID service is registered, the Telecommunication Office is able to provide the number of the
caller even if the caller restricts the provision of the number.

3.81 Temporary Call Transfer
I. Meaning
This service enables a subscriber to transfer incoming calls to another number. When
this service is activated, all incoming calls will be forwarded to another telephone
pre-defined by the subscriber.
This service is similar to CFU, but the differences are:
Through call barring group number, the switch can restrict the forwarded calls of
a subscriber to a certain area.
When a call is forwarded, the new callee cannot use Temporary Call Transfer,
Call Forwarding to operator, Call Forwarding No Reply, Call Forwarding Busy,
Inquiry/Transfer and Three-Party service.
Forwarding is free of the effect of the callee's state.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the authority of CFU (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
B Forward-to subscriber
C Caller
PQABCD Subscriber B's number (forward-to number designated by Subscriber A)
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *21*PQABCD#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-172
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C calls Subscriber A
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber C hears
the ring back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #21#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example
Suppose there are three subscribers A, B and C. The number of B is 8883850 and
that of A is 8883851. The operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *21*8883850#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883851
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber C hears
the ring back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-173
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #21#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

Note:
The call barring group number 60000 is designated to restrict CF by local subscribers. When a local
subscriber activates temporary call transfer service, in addition to judgment of outgoing call authority
of the subscriber, 60000 will be taken as the call barring group number of the subscriber to check the
outgoing call authority.
For the sake of convenience, use software parameters to control whether to check the outgoing calls
of the subscriber.
If OVS_CCB_PARA2_BIT0 is set to 0, use call barring group number 60000 to query call barring
data and check outgoing call authority;
If OVS_CCB_PARA2_BIT0 is set to 1, CF will not be restricted.
If the software parameter F150_SERVICE_BIT14 is set to 1, CF will not be affected by the state of
the callee.
Refer to CFU service for other matters for attention.

3.82 Three-Party Service (3PTY)
I. Meaning
When Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber B, if there is a need for Subscriber C
(the third party) to join the conversation, Subscriber A can dial the third party number
without interrupting the conversation with Subscriber B to achieve the three-party
communication or conversation with either party.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "3PTY" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-174
B, C Callees
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the telephone number of
Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber B hears the music
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber
C
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber C hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone,
Subscribers B and C hear the music
Subscriber A dials 1
Subscriber A talks with one party, and the other
party hears the busy tone
Subscriber A dials 2
Subscriber A talks with one party, and the other
party hears the music
Subscriber A dials 3 Subscribers A, B and C talk with each other
If Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers B and C hear the busy tone
If Subscriber B or C hangs up Subscriber A talks with another party

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
If Subscriber B's number is 8883850 and Subscriber C's number is 8883851, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears
the ringing tone
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-175
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber B
hears the music
Subscriber A dials 8883851
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C hears
the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscribers B
and C hear the music
Subscriber A dials 1
Subscriber A talks with one party, and the other party hears the
busy tone
Subscriber A dials 2
Subscriber A talks with one party, and the other party hears the
music
Subscriber A dials 3 Subscribers A, B and C talk with each other
If Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers B and C hear the busy tone
If Subscriber B or C hangs up Subscriber A talks with another party

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
When applying for the three-party service, the subscriber cannot apply for all outgoing call restriction
services at the same time.

3.83 Toll Call Indication Service
I. Meaning
With the toll call indication service, toll offices or transit offices can inform end-office
subscribers of incoming toll calls. It is toll offices that send voice announcements.
When a toll switch or transit switch detects that the called party of a toll call is busy,
the switch will create a virtual remote operator through failure processing and send a
three-party voice announcement to the called party, like "xxxxx (the number of the
intruded B or C), you have a toll call. To answer it, please hang up. The caller number
is xxxxx (A number)". After the called party hooks on, the switch will ring it again.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-176
Then, the called party can hook off to talk to A. Thus, the toll call indication service is
achieved.
II. Data configuration
The following gives an example. In practice, select appropriate values according to
actual situations.
Operators can add failure processing data to achieve the toll call indication service for
the case that the called parties of the calls through a toll office are busy.
ADD CFPRO: PFX=K'010, FCC=BUSY, FSC=0, RUT=ALL, CSA=ALLSRVC, FPT=
TOLL;
The command means that the switch will offer the toll call indication service for the
unsuccessful calls to the "010" prefix whose failure reason is "Called busy".
III. Related software parameters
Bit 13 of the Call Testing Parameter 3 (P55) controls whether the office offers the toll
call indication service.
=1: Not offer (default value)
=0: Offer
Bit 15 of the Call Testing Parameter 3 (P55) controls whether the first ACM message
to the preceding office contains the failure cause value when the toll call indication
service is available.
=1: Contain the failure cause value (default value)
=0: No failure cause value
Bit 14 of the Oversea CCB Parameter 3 (P88) controls whether to use the failure
source code of the calling party or that of the called party for failure processing.
=1: Use the failure source code of the called party (default value)
=0: Use the failure source code of the calling party
Bit 0 of the ISUP Test Parameter 1 (P28) controls whether the office can offer the toll
call indication service when it is not a toll office but the opposite office is a toll office.
=1: Can offer the service (default value)
=0: Cannot offer the service

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-177
Note:
If a toll office offers the toll call indication service, all calls across the toll office will enjoy the service.
The service is not restricted by the supplementary service authority. That is, if an office offers the
service, all data-affected subscribers will automatically have the authority to use the service. It
should be noted that the subscribers belong to other switches.
The service entails the support of standards and signaling systems. Therefore, it is not available in
all countries.

3.84 Trunk Interrupt
I. Meaning
By applying this service, the operator can interrupte the conversation on the
designated trunk.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Operator
MMM Module number
TTTTT Trunk circuit number
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-178
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*92*MMM*TTTTT#
Subscriber A disconnects the trunk circuit TTTTT of module
MMM.
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose the trunk circuit to be disconnected is 10 of module 1, the operation process
is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*92*001*00010#
Subscriber A disconnects the trunk circuit 10 of module 1
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service is for operator only, but the operator cannot be a Centrex subscriber.
The module number and the trunk circuit number must be valid.
For the following circumstances, conversation on the designated trunk cannot be disconnected:
a) The designated trunk is in idle state;
b) The designated trunk is occupied by internet calls;
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-179
3.85 Trunk Intrusion
I. Meaning
By applying this service, the operator can break in the conversation on the designated
trunk.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Operator
MMM Module number
TTTTT Trunk circuit number
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *90*MMM*TTTTT#
Subscriber A intrudes the conversation on the trunk
circuit TTTTT of module MMM.
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended.

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-180
IV. Example
Suppose the trunk circuit to be intruded is 10 of module 1, the operation process is as
follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*90*001*00010#
Subscriber A intrudes the conversation on the trunk circuit 10 of
module 1
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service is for operator only, but the operator cannot be a Centrex subscriber.
The module number and the trunk circuit number must be valid.
For the following circumstances, conversation on the designated trunk cannot be intruded:
a) The designated trunk is in idle state;
b) The designated trunk is occupied by internet calls;
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.86 Trunk Monitoring
I. Meaning
By using this service, the operator can monitor the conversation on the designated
trunk.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-181
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Operator
MMM Module number
TTTTT Trunk circuit number
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*91*MMM*TTTTT#
Subscriber A hears the conversation on the trunk circuit TTTTT
of module MMM
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
IV. Example
Suppose the trunk circuit to be monitored is 10 of module 1, the operation process is
as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
*91*001*00010#
Subscriber A hears the conversation on the trunk circuit 10 of
module 1
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-182
3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service is for operator only, but the operator cannot be a Centrex subscriber.
The module number and the trunk circuit number must be valid.
For the following circumstances, conversation on the designated trunk cannot be monitored:
a) The designated trunk is in idle state;
b) The designated trunk is occupied by internet calls;
This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.87 Two-Stage Dialing
I. Meaning
This service enables the secondary digit dialing after hearing the secondary dialing
tone, and sends all the digits together in case of inter-digit dialing timeout. In addition,
the service requires that answer signal cannot be sent until the callee answers the
call.
II. Setting conditions
Based on Pre-Paid Service (PPS), two-stage dialing service also needs Intelligent
Service Control Point (ISCP) to control the service flow. For PPS in card mode, the
system adds a module to simulate Service Control Point (SCP) for the control, and
other processing employs the IN flow. Because this service employs the flow of PPS
in card mode, intelligent data should be configured, including prefix data, card service
configuration table data, intelligent Detect Point (DP) data, resource capability data,
resource searching data, caller discrimination data, black & white call barring data
and IN flow software parameter.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-183
III. Operation
Start
No
Connect the call
Release the call
Yes
Yes
End
Called/calling
subscriber hangs up
No
Dial the access
code
Hear the secondary
dialing tone
Dial the called
number
PC
operation result received
or not
Called subscriber
idle or not

Figure 3-3 Flow chart
After dialing the access code, the subscriber hears the secondary dialing tone, then
inputs the called number and waits for 5 seconds for connection. If the subscriber
does not dial any number, the initial digit dialed will be released due to timeout. After
the called number is dialed, the call will be connected 5 seconds later, and it will be
released in case of callee not found/busy/no reply or other route faults. The service
flow will not continue until the callee answers the call.

Note:
For two-stage dialing service, only number initial dialing timeout and inter-digit dialing timeout in the
card service configuration table are effective for the system.
The original PPS provides a lot of special processing in billing, therefore, the basic IN prefix should
be selected instead of PPS prefix in case of adding a prefix.
Refer to PPS for the detailed data configuration.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-184
IV. Example
Refer to operation.
3.88 Wake up (Alarm) Service
I. Meaning
When the time specified by the subscriber arrives, the telephone rings to remind the
subscriber to do what he/she has planned.
II. Setting conditions
The subscriber has the "wake up service" authority (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it).
III. Operation
Suppose:
A Service subscriber
HH Hours set by the subscriber (00~23)
MM Minutes set by the subscriber (00~59)
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *55*HHMM# (on Dual
Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) phone) or
155HHMM (on pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
The wake up service is a one-time service. When the specified time arrives, the
telephone rings automatically. You will hear the prompt voice if picking up the handset,
and afterwards, this service will be cancelled. The ringing will stop if the telephone
rings for one minute without being picked up. Five minutes later, the telephone will
ring again for one minute, and if still no one answers, this service will be cancelled
automatically.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3-185
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #55# (on DTMF phone) or
151155 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example
If the time specified by Subscriber A is 12: 20, that is, HH=12, MM=20, the operation
process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *55*1220# (on DTMF
phone) or 1551220 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
When the specified time 12:20 arrives, the telephone rings automatically. You will
hear the prompt voice by picking up the handset, and afterwards, this service will be
cancelled. The ringing will stop if the telephone rings for one minute without being
picked up. Five minutes later, the telephone will ring again for one minute, and if still
no one answers, this service will be cancelled automatically.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #55# (on DTMF phone) or
151155 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and do-not-disturb service.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and absent subscriber service.
The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and call forwarding service.




HUAWEI








C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
Operation Manual Supplementary Services
Volume
Centrex Services





Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

i
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services.................................................................................... 1-1
Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services............................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Basic Call Services ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Centrex Operator Services ................................................................................................ 2-2
Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services .............................................................................. 3-1

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services

1-1
Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services
With the fast development of computer technology and multimedia technology, the
switching equipment providing only the voice switching services over the
telecommunication network is not able to meet the demands of subscribers in the new
era. The Central Exchange (Centrex) of the C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
(shortened as C&C08 EV Switch hereinafter) integrates Narrow-band ISDN (N-ISDN)
with IN services to provide the business subscribers with a wide range of qualified
services.
Centrex means to group part of the subscribers (for example, a company) connected
to the switches into a virtual Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) subscriber
group, and to provide them with the PABX services. In addition, this subscriber group
enjoys some special telecom services. Centrex is suitable for factories, mines,
enterprises, universities and colleges, hospitals, government organs, group
companies, hotels and financial institutions.
C&C08 EV Switch supports up to 65,535 Centrex groups, each of which can be
divided into 256 sub-groups. The number of subscribers of each Centrex group is
subject only to the capacity of the switch concerned, without any other restrictions.
The software of the switch provides all the Centrex functions. Each Centrex
subscriber has two numbers, one is the PSTN number, called the long number; the
other is the short number used to call subscribers within the Centrex group. To use
the Centrex services, you do not need to add or change any hardware equipment
other than the operator console. The Centrex subscribers and common subscribers
have the same hardware interfaces. The Centrex subscribers include ordinary
subscribers, ISDN subscribers, and access network subscribers, featuring easy
access, free distribution of subscribers, and flexible processing of scattered
subscribers. The subscribers in the same Centrex group can be distributed in multiple
Remote Switching Modules (RSMs) and Remote Subscriber Areas (RSAs), and may
be distributed in other offices as well.
With the development of the Centrex, C&C08 EV Switch has been able to provide the
Wide Area Centrex (WAC) interface, which helps to group the Centrex groups
scattered in different offices into a specialized network. The intra-WAC calls are
completed by the local office, and the inter-WAC calls are completed with the help of
the SCP and Service Switching Point (SSP) over the CCS7 signaling network.
Compared to the traditional PBX, the Centrex has the following advantages:
1) Users can enjoy all the advanced functions without purchasing any PBX.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services

1-2
2) Users do not need to invest in the switching equipment, equipment room and
power supply equipment, or to train the management and maintenance
personnel of the PBX equipment.
3) The PBX subscribers are confined to a PBX, but the Centrex subscribers can be
distributed widely without any geographical restrictions. Therefore, the expansion
gets facilitated without any capacity limitations.
4) The services and functions enjoyed by the Centrex subscribers are automatically
upgraded along with the upgrading of the switch to a higher version.
5) The number of trunks restricts the incoming and outgoing calls made by the PBX
subscribers, but there is no such restriction to the Centrex subscribers. Both the
incoming and outgoing calls are all connected in the Direct Outward Dialing-1
(DOD1)/ Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Outward Dialing-2 (DOD2) modes.
6) Both subscribers and equipment are managed by the Telecommunication Office
whose high-level maintenance and management ensure the stable and reliable
operation of such equipment.

Note:
Unless otherwise noted, the following Centrex services are all applicable to the WAC.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services

2-1
Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services
C&C08 EV Switch supplies the following basic services. To use them, first set Centrex
subscriber data. For the data setting, please refer to Chapter 5 of the subscriber data
volume of the operation manual. This chapter elaborates the Centrex services and
matters for attention.
2.1 Basic Call Services
I. Intra-group call
When a Centrex subscriber calls another subscriber of the same Centrex group,
he/she can choose to dial either the short number of the callee or the "outgoing
prefix plus the long number. Use the command ADD CXPFX to set the service prefix,
with service attribute being "Centrex intra-group.
II. Out-group call
A Centrex subscriber can make out-group calls after dialing the out-group prefix. Use
the command ADD ST to set the call-out authority.
III. Secondary dialing tone
When the Centrex subscribers have the authority of making outgoing calls, they first
dial the "outgoing prefix to listen to the secondary dialing tone, and then dial the
numbers of out-group subscribers. Use the command ADD CXGRP to set the
secondary dialing tone.
IV. Distinctive ringing
Centrex subscribers can set different ringing modes for intra-group and out-group
incoming calls so as to differentiate them. Use the command ADD CXGRP to set
different ringing modes.
V. Intra-group outgoing call restricted
It is to restrict Centrex subscribers from making intra-group calls. Use the command
ADD ST to set the call-out authority.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services

2-2
VI. Out-group outgoing call restricted
It is to restrict Centrex subscribers from making out-group calls. Use the command
ADD ST to set the call-out authority.
VII. Intra-group incoming call restricted
It is to restrict Centrex subscribers from receiving intra-group calls. Use the command
ADD ST to set the call-in authority.
VIII. Incoming call restricted
It is to restrict Centrex subscribers from receiving incoming calls. Use the command
ADD ST to set the call-in authority.
IX. Out-group direct dial in
When a non-Centrex subscriber calls a Centrex subscriber, he/she can directly dial
the long number of the subscriber.
X. Emergency outgoing call
The Centrex subscribers can directly make emergency calls, such as fire call and
police call, without dialing the outgoing prefix, but they are required to make a
Centrex call prefix record, with its attribute as "out-group emergency call by
command ADD CXPFX. You can also make only one ordinary Centrex group call
prefix record, and change the number into "outgoing prefix + emergency call prefix.
2.2 Centrex Operator Services
I. Operator position
A subscriber of a Centrex group can be set as an operator. To set an operator, use
the command ADD CXCON.
II. Operator's access code
Centrex subscribers can directly make calls to the operator by only dialing an access
code, which can be set by the command ADD CXCON.
III. Call forwording to operator on busy
When a non-Centrex subscriber calls a Centrex subscriber and the called subscriber
is busy, the call can be forwarded to the operator. Use the command MOD CXGRP to
set this service.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services

2-3
IV. Call forwarding to operator on no reply
When a non-Centrex subscriber calls a Centrex subscriber and the called subscriber
has not answered the call for a long time, the call can be forwarded to the operator.
Use the command MOD CXGRP to set this service.
V. Operator monitoring
The operator can monitor any local call of an ordinary subscriber of the Centrex group.
For its service prefix and operation procedures, refer to the section "PSTN
Supplementary Services" in this manual.
VI. Forced intrusion by operator
The operator can forcedly intrude into any local call of an ordinary subscriber of the
Centrex group. For its service prefix and operation procedures, refer to the section
"PSTN Supplementary Services" in this manual.
VII. Forced release by operator
The operator can forcedly release any local call of an ordinary subscriber of the
Centrex group. Its service prefix is generally set to "*89*". For the operation
procedures, refer to the section "PSTN Supplementary Services" in this manual.
VIII. Operator override DDS
When the Do-not-Disturb Service is set for a Centrex subscriber, the "operator
override DDS" service will enable the operator to override the DDS and call the
subscriber. Use the command ADD CXPFX to set its service prefix. For operation
procedures, refer to the section "PSTN Supplementary Services" in this manual.
IX. Operator log-in service
With this service, a Centrex subscriber can change his/her attribute into operator, so
he/she can have the function of the operator. Its service prefix is generally set to
"*65#".

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services

2-4
Note:
Only the Centrex subscriber can carry out operator registration and cancellation. When the
subscriber is registered as operator, he/she can implement monitoring, insertion or deletion
operations.
When the subscriber is registered as operator, he/she temporarily owns the operator attributes. In
setting subscriber data next time, the operator attributes will be lost.
The pulse phone cannot use this service.

X. Operator cancellation service
This service enables a Centrex subscriber to change his/her attribute from an
operator into an ordinary subscriber. Its service prefix is generally set to "#65#".

Note:
The services in this chapter are the special services of Centrex operators. For other operator services,
for example, Operator Call Barring Service, please refer to the section "PSTN Supplementary Services"
in this manual.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services

3-1
Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services
Besides the Centrex basic services, Centrex subscribers can enjoy the
supplementary services of ordinary PSTN subscribers. As there are too many Centrex
supplementary services, this chapter lists only the supplementary services achieved
by Centrex subscribers. The meaning, operation methods and restrictions of a
Centrex supplementary service are the same as those of the PSTN supplementary
service with the same name. For details, please refer to the section "PSTN
Supplementary Services" in this manual.

Note:
Centrex supplementary services can use the same service prefixes as PSTN supplementary
services, or new service prefixes (defined by the command ADD CXPFX). It should be noted that the
newly defined service prefixes should not conflict with the intra-group call prefix and out-group call
prefix.
The register subscribers of Centrex supplementary services are all Centrex subscribers.
The called party of a Centrex supplementary service may belong to a Centrex group or not. When
the callee belongs to no Centrex group, the out-group prefix must precede the called number.
Otherwise, the system will prompt a fault.
Unless otherwise specified, all the following services are applicable to the intra-group call and
out-group call.

Abbreviated Dialing Service
Hotline Service (applicable to only out-group long numbers)
Wake up (Alarm) Service
Absent Subscriber Service
Do-not-Disturb Service
Call Barring Service
Malicious Call Identification Service
Registered Call on Busy Service (applicable to only intra-group short numbers)
Call Forwarding Unconditional Service
Call Forwarding on Busy Service
Call Forwarding No Reply Service
Call Waiting Service
Call Back on Busy Service
Three-Party Service
Conference Calling Service
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services

3-2
Calling Line Identification Restriction Service
Number Barring Service
To register the service, the prefix is generally "*542*". To cancel the service, the prefix
is generally "#543*".
Secretary Service
Bit 6 of CCB internal parameter 4 decides whether the call from the Centrex group is
directly connected to the manager or transferred by the secretary. If bit 6 is 1 (default
value), all calls go to the secretary first. If bit 6 is 0, calls from the Centrex group
directly go to the manager.
Secretary Station Service
Activate Call Forwarding Table Service
Remote Activation of the CFU Service
The function is only valid to the subscribers in the same Centrex group.
Remote Activation of the CFB Service
The function is only valid to the subscribers in the same Centrex group.
Remote Activation of the CFNR
The function is only valid to the subscribers in the same Centrex group.
Modify Password Service
Record Service
Playback Service
CLIP and CLIR Service
Single Call Multi-Display Service
PIN Call Service
Its service prefix is generally set to "*32*".
Prompt of Outgoing Call Service
Booking Call Service
To register the service, the prefix is generally "*28*". To cancel the service, the prefix
is generally "#28#".
No Disturb when Calling
Call Transfer Service
Multiple Wake-ups Service
To register the service, the prefix is generally "*54*". To cancel the service, the prefix
is generally "#54#".
List Conference Service
Generally, to register the service, the prefix is "*21*". To use the service, the prefix is
"*23*". To reject a party, the prefix is "#23*". To cancel a party, the prefix is "#21*". To
cancel all conference parties, the prefix is "#22*".
Conference Incoming Call Service
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services

3-3
Cancel All Registered Services
Generally, to register the service, the prefix is "*22*".
Advice of Charge Service
Prompt of Incoming Call Service
Calling Line Identification Presentation
Calling Line Identification during Call Waiting
CLIR Override
Caller Name Display Service
Calling Name Per Line Blocking Service
Calling Name Per Call Blocking Service
Calling Name Per Call Unblocking Service
Cancel Call Waiting Service
Duplex and Distinctive Ringing Service
Message Waiting Notification Service
Block the Blocker Service
Temporary Call Transfer
Inquiry Service
Number Incomplete
Quick Access Function
Priority Subscriber
Black & White List
Call Watch Service
Call Forwarding to Voice Mailbox
Delay Hotline Service
Prompt of Number Change Service
Park on
Two Stage Dialing
PPS
Telephone Set Self-Test Service
Assigned Pickup Call in Group
When a Centrex subscriber's phone rings, another subscriber of the same Centrex
group can answer the call by dialing the assigned pickup access code and the short
number of the ringing phone.

Note:
This service is available for out-group ordinary subscriber (using the long number) and the
intra-group subscribers (using the extension number).
A Centrex subscriber can not perform pickup for an out-group subscriber.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services

3-4
Co-group pickup call in Centrex
Some subscribers of a Centrex group can form a group. When a subscriber's phone
in the group rings, another subscriber of the same group can directly answer the call
by dialing only the pickup access code.

Note:
The Centrex group cannot cross several modules.
If several extensions ring at the same time, the pickup priority should be determined according to the
ringing order.

Call Forwarding by Hooking
When a non-Centrex subscriber calls a Centrex subscriber, the callee can forward the
call to another Centrex subscriber by first pressing the hook then dialing the short
number of the forward-to Centrex subscriber.



HUAWEI








C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
Operation Manual Supplementary Services
Volume
ISDN Services





Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

i
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System...................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Features of the C&C08 EV ISDN....................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Network Structure and Signaling Composition of C&C08 EV ISDN.................................. 1-2
1.2.1 ISDN Network Structure.......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 ISDN Signaling Composition................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 ISDN Interface......................................................................................................... 1-4
Chapter 2 ISDN Services .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Basic Services ................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Bearer Services ................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3 User Integrated Services ................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4 Supplementary Services.................................................................................................... 2-6
2.5 Centrex Services.............................................................................................................. 2-19

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System
The Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) is developed on the basis of the
Integrated Digital Telephone Network (IDN). It provides the end to end digital
connection and supports several kinds of telecom services, including the voice
services and non-voice services. The subscribers can be accessed to the network
through the standard subscriber-network interfaces.
The C&C08 EV ISDN offers multi-purpose subscriber-network interfaces and supports
the interconnection with other networks. It fulfills the compatibility of the analog
subscribers with the digital subscribers and smooth transition, integrates the
telephone communication and the data communication, and realizes the complete
digitization.
1.1 Features of the C&C08 EV ISDN
The C&C08 EV ISDN (that is, the C&C08 EV Switch) supports the end to end digital
connection by offering the digital telephone network. It aims at providing a series of
comprehensive services (including voice services and non-voice services) and offers
the subscribers a group of limited and standard subscriber-network interfaces.
The C&C08 EV ISDN has three basic features:
End to end digital connection
At the place where the subscribers are accessed to the switch, it supports 2B+D,
23B+D, 30B+D and nB+mD standard interfaces. Among them, D channel is 64 kbit/s
bearer channel. D channel is 16 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s signaling channel.
Subscriber
Terminal
Subscriber
Terminal
End
office
End
office
Dgital
Transmission
Dgital
Transmission
Dgital
Transmission

Figure 1-1 ISDN schematic diagram
Integrated services
The C&C08 EV ISDN supports various integrated services such as voice, data, text
and picture services, and also supports the interconnection between several kinds of
networks. For example, it supports the interconnection between the Public Switched
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

1-2
Telephone Network (PSTN), the Packet Switched Public Data Network (PSPDN), the
Frame Relay (FR) network, the Internet and the Local Area Network (LAN).
Standard network interface
Different services and terminals can be accessed to the network through a unified
interface.
In addition to the above basic features, the C&C08 EV ISDN has the following
features:
It supports the semi-permanent B channel access service, exchangeable B
channel access service, D channel semi-permanent access service and D
channel Permanent Logic Link (PLL) service.
It supports the user terminal services, such as telephone service, fax service,
video telephone, videotex and data communication.
It supports the supplementary service.
The various remote modules support the access of the ISDN subscribers.
It has consummate signaling system.
The slots of the interface boards are compatible with each other. The protocol
processing boards have the same hardware; they can be loaded with different
protocols software and can accomplish the processing of different signaling
types. This makes the adding of the ISDN subscribers economical and flexible.
The C&C08 EV ISDN offers consummate maintenance and test method.
It enjoys rich experience in network construction.
It supports the charging according to ports.
It supports the Digital Data Network (DDN) sub-rate and multiple rate access.
It supports the mixed networking of the Primary Rate Access (PRA) with the
Telephone User Part (TUP) and ISDN User Part (ISUP) and supports the control
of several PCMs by one PRA signaling link. In the system, several subscribers
on the PRA port can be divided into different groups, and in each group different
authority controls and B-channel selections can be performed.
1.2 Network Structure and Signaling Composition of C&C08
EV ISDN
1.2.1 ISDN Network Structure
The basic structure of ISDN is shown in Figure 1-2.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

1-3
ISDN network
Packet switching
capability
Circuit switching
capability
None- swithcing
connection
capability
Public channel
signaling
capability
ISDN
switch
TE
Subscriber information
Subscriber information
Subscriber-network signaling Subscriber-network signaling
Subcriber-subsriber signaling
TE
ISDN
switch

Figure 1-2 Basic structure of ISDN
ISDN has several kinds of service capabilities to bear different services:
Circuit switching capability
Packet switching capability
None-switching connection capability
Public channel signaling capability
1.2.2 ISDN Signaling Composition
All signaling systems of the ISDN adopt the public channel signaling mode. The
signaling channels are separated from the subscriber information channel. It is shown
in Figure 1-3.
DSS1
ISDN
DSS1
TE TE
ISDN
User-User Signaling (UUS)
Subscriber Terminal Subscriber Terminal
Switch
Switch
Inter-office
Signaling

Figure 1-3 C&C08 EV ISDN signaling system
The signaling systems used by ISDN include the inter-office signaling, Digital
Subscriber Signaling No.1 (DSS1) and User to User Signaling (UUS).
Inter-office signaling
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

1-4
It refers to the control signal between the ISDN switches. The signaling can be the
ISUP message in the No. 7 signaling. It is also supported by the PRA interface in the
DSS1. The ISUP is one kind of the User Parts (UP) of the No. 7 public channel
signaling system. It provides the necessary signal functions to the basic bearer
services and supplementary services which support the voice and non-voice functions
in ISDN.
Subscriber-network signaling
It refers to the control signal between the user terminal and the network. The
signaling is DSS1 and the inter-office signaling is similar to that in the ISUP.
Subscriber-subscriber signaling
It refers to the control signal between the user terminal equipments. The channel of
the signaling is provided by the DSS1 and ISUP. The signaling is transparently
transmitted in the network and is called UUS.
1.2.3 ISDN Interface
The C&C08 EV ISDN provides the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate
Interface (PRI). It also offers two kinds of communication channels, namely B channel
(64 kbit/s) to bear the service and D channel (16 kbit/s) to transmit the call control
signaling and the management information. Besides, it provides the Packet Handling
Interface (PHI) interface to interconnect with the PSPDN.
I. BRI
The rate of the BRI interface (2B+D) is 144 kbit/s. The BRI supports two 64 kbit/s
subscriber channels (B channels) and one 16 kbit/s signaling channel (D channel). It
can be used by several ISDN equipments. Two B channels bound together can
provide the transmission at a rate of 128 kbit/s. By using the compression calculation
method, the transmission speed will be higher. One BRI interface can be connected
to eight terminals. It supports the point-to-multipoint configuration. Each terminal can
have independent ISDN number or sub-addressing.
The BRI interface board of the C&C08 EV ISDN is the Digital Subscriber Line board
(DSL). The slots of the DSL are completely compatible with the slots of the Analog
Subscriber Line board (ASL). This facilitates the subscriber capacity expansion. In
terms of the physical line, the DSL adopts the 2B1Q code type. Each DSL provides
eight User interfaces (U interfaces), and fulfills the digitization of eight twisted pairs.
The U interface meets the requirements specified in ITU-T Recommendations G.960.
II. PRI
According to different intervals divided in the PCM system (E1=32 timeslot (TS),
T1=24TS), the PRI/PRA is divided into the 30B+D interface (adopted in China and
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

1-5
Europe) and 23B+D interface (adopted in North America and Japan). The rate of the
30B+D interface is 2048 kbit/s. The interface supports thirty 64 kbit/s subscriber
channels (B channels) and one 64 kbit/s signaling channel (D channel).
The PRI unit of the C&C08 EV ISDN comprises the interface circuit board (PRA) and
the protocol processing board (LAPPRA). It provides thirty 64 kbit/s B channels and
one 64 kbit/s D channel. The PRA board mainly fulfills the PRI functions, which
include the extraction of the synchronization clock, the Cyclic Redundancy Check
(CRC) and D channel transparent transmission. The LAPPRA board processes the
DSS1 of the link layer and network layer sent from D channel. Besides, it
communicates with the main processor to fulfill the circuit switching and call control
processing.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-1
Chapter 2 ISDN Services
The basic task of the ISDN is to offer the subscribers with integrated, comprehensive
and diversified services. The ISDN services must be complete, be able to ensure the
end-to-end compatibility, adopt the standard service processing and fulfill the
top-quality communication between the terminal subscribers national wide and
international wide.
The classification of the ISDN services is shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Applications of the C&C08 EV ISDN services
Service
Bandwidt
h
Telephone Data Text Picture
64 kbit/s
Telephone
Leased
telephone
Information
retrieval (through
voice analysis
and synthesis)
Packet switched
data
Circuit switched
data
Leased circuit
Remote
measurement
Funds transfer
Information retrieval
Mailbox
E-mail
Alarm
Subscriber
telegraph
Intelligent
subscriber
telegraph
Leased circuit
Videotext
Information
retrieval
Mailbox
E-mail
Video terminal
Fax
Information retrieval
Monitoring
>64 kbit/s Music
High-speed
computer
communication
LAN interconnection
Internet access

Video conference
Video data
Videophone
Cable television
(TV)

The service attributes of the C&C08 EV ISDN are introduced in the following part.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-2
2.1 Basic Services
ISDN basic services comprise bearer services and user integrated services
(tele-services). Bearer services are provided by the network (switching system), while
the user integrated services are provided by the terminal that originates the service
request.
Therefore, the attributes of the basic service are comprehensive and diversified. They
can be created by combining the description of the user integrated service (described
through the higher layer consistency) defined by the ITU_T/ European
Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) or service attributes defined by
specific countries with the description of the bearer service (described through the
bearer capability) defined by the ITU_T/ETSI. Each subscriber of the C&C08 EV
IDSN has the following basic service attributes:
1) Voice
2) Unrestricted_Digital_Info
3) 3.1 kHz Audio
4) 77 kHz Audio
5) 3.1 kHz Telephony
6) 7 kHz Telephony
7) Telefax_Group 2/3
8) Teltfax_Group 4
9) Videotex_syntax
10) Teletex
11) Video_Telephony
12) Packet Services
C&C08 EV Switch has offered the following services for ISDN subscribers besides
having achieved the call connection between ISDN subscribers, between ISDN
subscribers and PSTN subscribers, and between ISDN subscribers and V5
subscribers.
Point-to-point calling
In the case that the callee is a PRA subscriber or a Basic Rate Access (BRA)
subscriber and the called port has only one terminal, the terminal can prompt, answer
and release the call.
Point-to-multi-point calling
When a call reaches a port, the multiple terminals of the port can simultaneously or
separately give prompts. If a terminal answers the call, other terminals will clear their
calls. In this case, the callee must be an ISDN BRA subscriber and the called terminal
must be an ordinary ISDN terminal which supports automatic allocation of Terminal
Endpoint Identifiers (TEI).
PBX cyclic hunting function
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-3
Several BRA or PRA ports can be set as cyclic hunting ports and the number of one
of them can be set to a PBX indicating/pilot number. When the PBX pilot number is
called, the switch will search a port which has idle B channels among the cyclic
hunting ports according to a certain rule and then send the call to the port.
2.2 Bearer Services
Bearer services are the information transport services provided by ISDN switch for
transparent information (including voice, data and picture) transmission between
subscribers. It corresponds to the functions in the lower three layers of Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) model.
ISDN-supported bearer services can be divided into circuit bearer services and
packet bearer services, according to the specific access mode.
I. Circuit bearer services
The circuit bearer services include circuit switching and semi-permanent connection.
1) 64 kbit/s and 8 kHz bearer service to transmit the voice information. The
processing technologies such as analog transmission, echo cancellation and low
bit rate coding suitable to the voice can be adopted. This kind of bearer service
provides the local, toll and international voice service between ISDN subscribers
as well as between ISDN subscriber and PSTN subscriber.
2) 64 kbit/s and 8 kHz bearer service to transmit the 3.1 kHz audio information. The
voice processing techniques (such as digital voice interpolation) must be
prohibited. This kind of bearer service provides local, toll and international 3.1
kHz data service between ISDN subscribers, between ISDN subscribers
(including ISDN remote subscriber and ISDN PBX (ISPBX) extension subscriber)
and the Modem or fax in the telephone network (including remote subscribers
and PBX subscribers).
3) Semi-permanent and exchangeable 64 kbit/s, 8 kHz bearer service to transmit
unrestricted digital information and provide 64 kbit/s transparent transmission.
This kind of bearer service provides the local, toll and international unrestricted
digital service between ISDN subscribers (including ISDN remote subscribers
and ISPBX extension subscribers).
4) Semi-permanent and exchangeable 264 kbit/s, 8 kHz bearer service to transmit
the unrestricted digital information. Bearer services of this kind provide local, toll
and semi-permanent transmission of n64 kbit/s unrestricted data information
between ISDN subscribers (including ISDN remote subscribers).
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-4
II. Packet bearer services
Bearer services of this kind establish virtual circuits on the B-channel or D-channel at
the S/T reference point for transparent transmission of the subscriber information in
packets. The packet-switching function is provided by PSPDN.
B-channel semi-permanent access service
By establishing semi-permanent B-channel connection with PSPDN through the local
PHI, the switch allows the ISDN subscribers to transmit over the B-channel the
signaling information of Virtual Calls (VC) and the maintenance information of
Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVC), and implements VC and PVC services between
ISDN packet subscribers (including the packet subscribers of ISDN remote modules)
and PSPDN subscribers, between ISDN packet subscribers or between ISDN and
PSTN packet subscribers.
Exchangeable B-channel access service
By establishing exchangeable B-channel connection with PSPDN through the local
PHI, The switch allows the ISDN subscribers to transmit over the B-channel only the
signaling information of VCs, and provides VC services between ISDN packet
subscribers (including the packet subscribers of ISDN remote modules) and PSPDN
packet subscribers, between ISDN packet subscribers, or between ISDN and PSTN
packet subscribers.
D-channel semi-permanent access service
Through the preset mode, the switch keeps the physical layer and the link layer of the
D-channel of the ISDN subscribers permanently activated, allows the ISDN
subscribers to transmit over the D-channel the signaling information of VCs and the
maintenance information of PVCs, and connects them to the PSPDN through the
local PHI so as to enable VC and PVC services between ISDN packet subscribers
(including the packet subscribers of ISDN remote modules) and packet switched
network subscribers, between ISDN packet subscribers, or between ISDN and PSTN
packet subscribers.
D-channel PLL service
Through the preset mode, the switch can keep the physical layer of the D-channel of
ISDN subscribers permanently activated, while the link layer is connected at any time
when needed. The ISDN subscribers can transmit over the D-channel the signaling
information of VCs and the maintenance information of PVCs. The switch can also be
connected with the PSPDN through the local PHI to provide VC and PVC services
between ISDN packet subscribers (including the packet subscribers of ISDN remote
modules) and packet switched network subscribers, between ISDN packet
subscribers, or between ISDN and PSTN packet subscribers.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-5
2.3 User Integrated Services
User integrated (telecom) services are user-oriented services, including both the
network functions and the terminal equipment functions. These services correspond
to the functions in layer 1 to layer 7 of the OSI model, and are provided by the ISDN
switch and the corresponding ISDN terminals.
The C&C08 EV ISDN Switch, collaborated with ISDN terminals, provides the following
user integrated services:
1) Telephony: The telephony service provides the subscribers with the real time
bi-directional dialog capability exchangeable over the network. The voice
frequency is 3.1 kHz. The digital signals follow the specified voice coding rules.
The network uses digital signal processing technology. The user voice signals
are transmitted over B-channel, and the control signaling is transmitted over
D-channel.
2) Teletex: Teletex provides end-to-end message communication. It uses the
standard character set, standard format and communication protocol. Its high
layer characteristics are based on Conference Consultatif International du
Telephon et Telegraphie (CCITT) Teletex recommendations. The information
can be transmitted in circuit mode or in packet mode.
3) Telefax G4: Telefax G4 provides end-to-end fax communication. It uses the
standard graphic coding, resolution and communication protocol. Its high layer
characteristics are based on CCITT Telefax G4 recommendations. The
information can be transmitted in circuit mode or in packet mode.
4) Videotex: The ISDN Videotex is the enhanced version of the existing Videotex
service. It adds character and graphic information retrieval function and
electronic mailbox function to the original Videotex. The information can be
transmitted in circuit mode or packet mode.
5) Telex: Telex provides interactive message communication. Its digital information
above the ISDN physical layer conforms to international Telex protocols. ITU-T
recommends that Telex transmit information over the B-channel in the circuit
mode.
6) Telephony 7 kHz: This service can provide the subscribers with hi-fi realtime
bi-directional dialog switching over the network. Its bandwidth is up to 7 kHz.
7) Videophone: This service can simultaneously provide the subscribers with the
realtime bi-directional voice and video services switched over the network. The
voice and video information can be transmitted over either one B-channel or two
B-channels, depending on videophone terminals.
8) PC_Communication: This service can provide the subscribers with the realtime
bi-directional data communication switched over the network between Personal
Computers (PC) at different places. This service is also suitable for the
communication between workstations and servers.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-6
9) Internet service: This service enables ordinary telephone subscribers to access
the Internet through the ISDN 2B+D subscriber line which achieves the access to
an Internet Service Provider (ISP) in the dial-up mode. In this case, the
telephone subscriber uses the communication rate of 128 kbit/s provided by the
basic rate interface (2B+D) and the ISP uses the 2 Mbit/s interface provided by
the primary rate interface (30B+D). The ISDN provides high-speed channels for
the Internet access. It is required that the whole course from one end to the other
end is ISDN. This service is available for all 2B+D and 30B+D subscribers.
10) The subscribers of the same PRA port can be classified into different groups so
as to set different authorities for the subscribers of different groups. In this way,
the subscribers of a group can have different authorities from those of another
group. The B channels of a PRA port can also be classified into different groups.
The subscribers of a group can use the B channels of a different group. This
service is available for all the 30B+D subscribers.
2.4 Supplementary Services
ISDN supplementary services are provided to the subscribers together with bearer
services and telecom services. The C&C08 EV ISDN supplementary services fully
conform to ITU-T recommendations. The keyboard protocol and functional protocol
are used in the operation and control of such supplementary services, so as to
improve the compatibility of terminals.
This section describes the principles and performances of the supplementary services
for ISDN terminal subscribers.

Note:
Only the simple conception is described here. Please refer to Chapter 1 PSTN Services of this
manual for detailed description.
The detailed operation procedures may vary due to the use of ISDN phone set. Please refer to the
phone set user manual for operation.
The following services are also available for ISDN Centrex subscribers.

I. Multiple subscriber number (MSN)
The ISDN S/T interface can connect up to 8 terminals.
MSN provides the possibility to allocate multiple ISDN numbers to a single public or
private access. The MSN service allows each terminal connected to the S/T interface
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-7
to have one or more identifiers, so that a single terminal (for example, if the passive
bus is configured) can be distinguished from other terminals.
Subscribers should first apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service. The
Telecommunication Office will allocate a set of appropriate ISDN numbers (not
necessarily consecutive) to the subscriber. Through the agreement between the
subscriber and the Telecommunication Office, one of the allocated ISDN numbers will
be designated as the default number of the interface corresponding to the MSN
subscriber.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
It cannot be registered simultaneously along with the Direct Dial In (DDI) service.
When activating the MSN service, the caller shall provide his/her complete ISDN number when
originating an outgoing call. If the caller provides no caller number or the sent caller number is invalid,
the originating network shall use the default number corresponding to the caller access as the caller
number and send it to the callee.
The call forwarding service is based on a single number. If the service subscriber has registered the
MSN service, the ISDN number used when activating/deactivating the call forwarding service can be
a MSN.

II. Sub-addressing (SUB)
The sub-addressing is used to identify multiple user terminal devices connected to the
same ISDN subscriber-network interface. Subscribers can set a sub-addressing of up
to 19 digits to distinguish from other terminals connected to the same interface. The
sub-addressing function expands the addressing capability, which was formerly
confined to one ISDN number. The sub-addressing function is similar to the MSN
function, but it requires the caller to transmit the number in "en bloc" mode since the
sub-addressing cannot be sent out in overlay mode. The advantage of using
sub-addressing is that it dose not occupy the limited ISDN number resources.
The service only specifies the transfer and use of the called sub-addressing. Other
sub-addressing information, such as caller sub-addressing and connected line
sub-addressing are not included in the description of the SUB service. Refer to the
CLIP and Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) for the detailed rules of
such information.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-8
The service will be provided upon subscription. Subscribers can apply to the
Telecommunication Office for it. After registration, the caller inputs the called
sub-addressing when originating calls, and then the network will transparently
transmit the sub-addressing information.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.
III. Calling line identification presentation (CLIP)
The CLIP service enables the callee to identify the ISDN number (and the
sub-addressing if possible) of the caller before answering the call. Therefore, the
callee can choose to answer, reject or hold the call.
This service will be provided upon subscription. Subscribers can apply to the
Telecommunication Office for it. After registration, this service will be available.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
If the caller has registered the CLIR service and the callee has not the "overriding" authority, the caller
number will not be transferred to the callee.

IV. Calling line identification restriction (CLIR)
The CLIR service enables the caller to restrict his/her ISDN number and
sub-addressing from being sent to the callee. Even if the callee has registered the
CLIP, he/she cannot see the caller number.
This service will be provided upon subscription.
The CLIR service provides two kinds of subscription: permanent subscription and
temporary subscription.
If the subscriber applies to the Telecommunication Office for permanent
subscription of CLIR service, CLIR will be activated for all calls.
If the subscriber applies to the Telecommunication Office for temporary
subscription of CLIR service, a default value (caller number "Display allowed" or
"Display restricted") must be designated. If the caller does not perform any
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-9
operation when originating calls, the default value will determine whether to
display the caller number or not.
When making a single call, the caller can determine either to display or not display
his/her number. In this case, the terminal shall have a special key that restricts the
provision of caller number. Refer to the network access requirements for the specific
methods of setting this key. Before making calls, press this special key to restrict the
provision of caller number.
As options, the switching equipment can provide the subscriber with the function
to activate/deactivate the CLIR service in the permanent mode.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
If the caller has registered the CLIR service, the callee will receive only the call waiting indication
without the caller number when he/she uses the call waiting service.
The CLIR service has a higher priority than the CLIP service. Only in the case that the callee has the
"overriding" authority, can the caller number be transferred to the callee.
If the caller has registered the CLIR service, his/her number will not be transferred to the forward-to
destination subscriber unless the destination subscriber is of the "overriding" type.
If the conference controller has registered and activated the CLIR service, his/her number will not be
transferred to the new conference members.

V. Connected line identification presentation (COLP)
The COLP service provides the caller with the ISDN number (and the sub-addressing
if possible) of the connected subscriber.
The service will be provided upon subscription. Subscribers can apply to the
Telecommunication Office for this service. After registration, this service will be
provided.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-10
Note:
If the callee has registered the COLR service and the caller has not the "overriding" authority, the
number of the connected line will not be transferred to the caller.

VI. Connected line identification restriction (COLR)
The COLR service enables the ISDN number and sub-addressing of connected
subscriber not to be provided to caller.
This service will be provided upon subscription.
The COLR service provides two subscription modes: permanent subscription and
temporary subscription.
If the subscriber applies to the Telecommunication Office for permanent
subscription of COLR service, the COLR will be activated for all calls.
If the subscriber applies to the Telecommunication Office for temporary
subscription of COLR service, a default value (the connected line number
"Display allowed" or "Display restricted") will be designated. If the callee does not
perform any operation when answering calls, the default value will determine
whether to display the called number or not.
When answering a single call, the callee can set either to display or not display
his/her number. In this case, the terminal shall have a special key that restricts the
provision of the called number. Refer to the network access requirements for the
specific methods of setting this key. Before answering calls, press this special key to
restrict the provision of the called number.
As options, the switching equipment can provide the subscriber with the function
to activate/deactivate the COLR service in the permanent subscription mode.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
If the callee has registered and activated the COLR service and the caller has invoked the call
waiting service, the called number will not be returned on receipt of the call waiting indication.
The COIR service has a higher priority than the COIP service. Only in the case that the caller is of
the "overriding" type, can the number of the connected line be transferred to the caller.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-11
VII. Call forwarding unconditional (CFU)
With the CFU service, the network will forward all incoming calls made to the service
subscriber (with ISDN number) to another number, and the call originating service of
the service subscriber will not be affected.
Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
The CFU service has a higher priority than the CFB service and the CFNR service.
If the caller has registered the CLIR service, the forward-to subscriber will receive no calling line
identification information unless he/she has the authority to override the CLIR service.

VIII. Call forwarding busy (CFB)
When the service subscriber is busy, the CFB service allows the network to forward
all incoming calls to another ISDN number, and the call originating service of the
service subscriber will not be affected.
A call is allowed to be forwarded only once (provisional international rules).
Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
The CFU service has a higher priority than the CFB service and the CFNR service.
If the caller has registered the CLIR service, the forward-to subscriber shall receive no calling line
identification information unless he/she is of the "overriding" type and has the authority to override
the CLIR service.

Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-12
IX. Call forwarding no reply (CFNR)
If the incoming calls to the service subscriber are not answered, the CFNR service
allows the network to forward these calls to another ISDN number, and the call
originating service of the service subscriber will not be affected.
The call will be forwarded after the phone rings for 20 seconds without pickup.
Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
The CFU service has a higher priority than the CFB service and the CFNR service.

X. Call waiting (CW)
If the service subscriber (callee) is busy when there is an incoming call, the CW
service will notify the subscriber of this incoming call, and the subscriber can decide
to receive, reject or ignore the waiting call. The service can simultaneously handle
multiple calls waiting at the same interface. Subscribers can specify the maximum
number of calls that could be handled while registering this service.
The CW is activated when two B-channels or one of them connected to the callee is
busy, or when the sole B-channel specified by the network for the ISDN number is
busy.
Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service, which
includes two subscription modes: permanent subscription and temporary subscription.
When there is no channel resource available at the interface and an incoming call
from another subscriber waiting at the interface, the callee can select to hold, answer
or reject the call, which respectively represent:
Hold the original subscriber and turn to talk with the new subscriber;
End the talk with the original subscriber and turn to talk with the new subscriber;
Reject the new incoming call.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-13
Note:
The CF services have higher priority than the CW service.

XI. Call hold (CH)
The CH service supports to hold calls and restore calls.
The hold function is used to release a connected B-channel, while the call reference
of this held call will be kept. The restore function is used to connect the held call to a
B-channel.
When the CH service is activated, the conversation over the B-channel will be
interrupted, and the B-channel will be held for later use by the network for the service
subscriber.
This service is valid for both the caller and the callee, who can initiate another call
with the ongoing talk being held. When the subscriber wants to resume the held talk,
he/she should request for it. The successful retrieval operation depends on whether
there is a B-channel held and whether a B-channel is available.
Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service. After the
registration, the service will be available.
When the subscriber is using this service, the operations he/she can choose include
Hold a call, Retrieve the original call or Handle another incoming call while talking.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.
XII. Terminal portability (TP)
At a given access interface, when a call is on its process, the TP service allows to
move a terminal from one port to another, or to move a call from one terminal to
another.
This service is valid for both the caller and the callee. The TP service is only
applicable to the BRI (2B+D).
The TP service provides the following functions for subscribers during call process:
Uses a compatible terminal to replace another at the same port.
Transfers a call from one terminal to another terminal connected to the same
basic interface.
Stops and then resumes calling in the same terminal and at the same port.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-14
Moves a terminal from one port to another.
This supplementary service is suitable for the user-interfered and interactive
circuit-switched services (for example, telephone), not suitable for non-interactive
services (for example, telex and computer communication).
The C&C08 EV Switch provides this service to all subscribers.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
The service subscriber of the three-party service is prohibited from activating the TP service.
The User-to-User Signaling service (UUS) is incompatible with the TP service. That is, the held call
cannot send user-user information between two users.

XIII. Conference calling (CONF)
The CONF service allows a subscriber to establish multiple-connected calls, that is, to
talk with more than two parties at the same time.
When the CONF is registered, the CONF resources (bridge circuits, for example) will
be allocated to the service subscribers, and the calls specified at the time of service
request will be added to the CONF. Once the CONF is activated, the parties can be
added, deleted, isolated, reconnected or divided. The controller can hold, restore or
end the connection.
The conference call is originated by the caller, who can hold, resume or end the
connections with the attendants present at the meeting.
Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service. After
registration, the CONF service will be available.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.


Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-15
Note:
The three-party call established by a service subscriber cannot be used to apply for the CONF service
and cannot join any existing conference call.

XIV. Three-party service (3PTY)
The 3PTY service enables the first party to add a third party to a call while holding the
ongoing call with the second party, and develops two-subscriber calls into a
three-party talk.
This service is available to both the caller and the callee.
In the course of three-party communication, you can request to:
Clear one party
End the three-party talk
Talk to one party separately
Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
The three-party call established by a service subscriber cannot be used to apply for the CONF
service and cannot join any existing conference call.
The remote subscriber of a three-party service can be the service controller of another three-party
service.
When using the UUS Service 3, the service subscriber of the three-party service can send and
receive User-to-User Information (UUI), while no UUI can be transmitted between the remote
subscribers.

XV. User-to-user signaling service (UUS)
The UUS supplementary service allows an ISDN subscriber to send or receive some
limited information over the signaling B channel between him/her and other ISDN
subscribers. Such information is transmitted transparently over the network.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-16
According to the categories of the services preset by subscribers, the UUS services
provided by the network and relating to circuit switching can be divided into the
following three categories:
Service 1: During the stages of call establishment and clearing, transmits the
UUI by adding it to the basic call control information.
Service 2: During the call establishment stage, transmits the UUI by using the
message independent of the call control message.
Service 3: Transmits the UUI during the call progress stage by using the
message independent of the call control message.
Well-designed UUS, as a typical service in ISDN, can perform multiple functions. For
example, by using the UUS, you can notify the other party of your number, your name
and other information, and you can leave a short message when the other party is
absent.
The UUS service is available to both the caller and the callee, but Service 1 and
Service 2 must be subscribed by caller, and service 3 can be subscribed by caller or
callee.
These three services can be used separately or together in one call.
Service 2 is only applicable to point-to-point configuration.
Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for UUS services 1, 2 and 3.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
When using the UUS Service 3, the service subscriber of the three-party service can send and receive
UUI, while no UUI can be transmitted between the remote subscribers.

XVI. Advice of charge (AOC)
AOC service provides subscribers with the charging information based on their use of
telephone services. AOC service is used only to notify the caller of his/her charging
information, but not a substitute for the network charging record.
AOC service is of the three types below and only the first two types can be used for
ISDN subscriber.
Advice of charge when a call is being set up (AOC-S)
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-17
If a subscriber has activated the AOCS service, the network will send the AOCS
information to his telephone after the called hooks off. Related tariff information will be
displayed on his telephone, including tariff of detailed ticket or meter, and metering
mode (a pulse within first n seconds and a pulse every n seconds later). Actual
displayed information depends on telephones.
Advice of charge during the call process (AOC-D)
If a subscriber has activated the AOCD service, the network will send the AOCD
information to his telephone every minute after a call is established. If the charging
method is detailed ticket, such information will be displayed on the service
subscriber's telephone as current charge (for one minute), currency, type of the
charging information (fixedly accumulative charging), and bill flag (fixedly normal
charging). If the charging method is meter, such information will be displayed as
current number of pulses (for one minute), type of the charging information, and bill
flag. If the call is free from charge, free flag will be displayed.
Advice of charge at the end of a call (AOC-E)
AOC-E enables the subscribers to receive the charging information of the call
recorded when the call ends.
When the AOC service is needed, just apply to the Telecommunication Office.
Refer to the user guide of telephone set or the descriptions provided by the
Telecommunication Office for the detailed setting procedures of the service on
telephone set.

Note:
The charging information sending to the caller is defined by the local office data and depends on the
telephone.
The service only supports the charging advice of the normal call and can not be used with other
supplementary services.
The maximum value of the fee supported by the AOCD service is 655.35 yuan. If the value is
greater than the maximum value, the network will send the same value each time (655.35).

XVII. MCID
Grant an ISDN subscriber with MCT authority on the MML and make a call to him.
After the call is put through, presses the "Hold" key on the phone set. At this time, the
ISDN subscriber will hear the dialing tone. Then dial "*33#" and the ISDN subscriber
will hear a voice announcement which tells him the caller number. Simultaneously,
there will be the event alarm 527 on the alarm console, which contains the caller and
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-18
called number of the call. After the ISDN subscriber hangs up, press the "Hold" key
and you can establish a call again.

Note:
In the case that Subscriber A calls Subscriber B but the call is forwarded to Subscriber C, only
Subscriber C can apply for the MCID service. When Subscriber C applies for the service, the ISDN
network side will register the numbers of Subscribers B and C at the alarm console. The original
called party number is Subscriber B's number, and called party number is Subscriber C's number.
Each multiple subscriber number supports the MCID service.

In addition to the above services, C&C08 EV Switch provides the ISDN subscribers
with the following supplementary services.
180 Service
Abbreviated Dialing Service
Absent Subscriber Service
ACM Service
Assigned Pickup
Block the Blocker
Booking Call
Call Forwarding to Voice Mailbox
Call Transfer (CT)
Caller Name Display
Calling Line Identification during Call Waiting
Cancel Call Waiting
CLIR Override
Conference Incoming Call
Do-not-Disturb Service
Duplex and Distinct Ringing
Hunting Group Service
Inquiry Service
Message Waiting Notification
Number Incomplete
No Disturb when Calling
Operator Call Barring
Outgoing Call Barring Service
Park on
Password Call
Prompt of Incoming Call
Prompt of Outgoing Call
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2-19
Registered Call on Busy
Remote Activation of the CFB Service
Remote Activation of the CFNR Service
Remote Activation of the CFU Service
Secretary Service
Secretary Station Service
Temporary Booking CLIP and CLIR
Wake up (Alarm) Service

Note:
The detailed operation procedures may vary due to the use of ISDN phone set. Refer to the phone set
user manual for operation.

2.5 Centrex Services
ISDN subscribers can form Centrex groups. The ISDN Centrex subscribers can enjoy
the ISDN basic services, ISDN bearer services, ISDN supplementary services,
Centrex basic services and Centrex supplementary services. The operations of the
first three kinds of services are the same as those of ISDN ordinary subscribers. And
the concepts and operations of the Centrex basic services and supplementary
services are the same as those described in the "Centrex Services" chapter of this
manual. The following two points should be noted.
Displaying just the short number of the intra-group caller number
In the case that both the caller and the called ISDN subscriber are in the same
Centrex group and the callee has registered the CLIP service, the displayed number
will be the short number/extension number of the caller no matter whether the caller
directly dials the short number or first dials the out-group prefix then the long number
of the callee.
Displaying just the short number of the intra-group connected line
After the callee hooks off, the number displayed on the caller's phone is the short
number of the connected line. In the case that both the callee and the calling ISDN
subscriber are in the same Centrex group and the caller has registered the COLP
service, the displayed number will be the short number/extension number of the
connected line no matter whether the caller directly dials the short number or first
dials the out-group prefix then the long number of the callee.


HUAWEI








C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
Operation Manual Supplementary Services
Volume
Appendix







Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

i
Table of Contents
Appendix A Relationship between Different Services...............................................................A-1
Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................................................B-1


Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System
Appendix A Relationship between Different
Services

A-1
Appendix A Relationship between Different
Services
A
B
CLIP CLIR COLP
COL
R
SU
B
CF
B
CF
NR
CF
U
CW CH TP
CO
NF
3P
TY
UU
S
MSN C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
CLIP C C C C C C C C C C C C C
CLIR C C C C C C C C C C C C
COLP C C C C C C C C C C C
COLR C C C C C C C C C C
SUB C C C C C C C C C
CFB C H L C C C C C
CFNR H C C C C C C
CFU L C C C C C
CW C C C C C
CH I C C C
TP I I L
CONF I C
3PTY C
Note:
The relationship refers to that between the different services registered on the same terminal.
C -- indicating service A is compatible with service B (Compatible), and they can coexist without conflicts.
I -- indicating service A is inconsistent with service B (Inconsistency), and they cannot be used simultaneously.
H -- indicating service A has higher priority than service B. If A and B are registered simultaneously, A will stand out.
L -- indicating service A has lower priority than service B. If A and B are registered simultaneously, B will stand out.
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-1
Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
ACD Automatic Call Distribution
AM Administration Module
ANSI American National Standard Institute
AOC Advice of Charge
AOC-E Advice Of Charge at the End of a call
ASL Analog Subscriber Line Board
ASYN Asynchronous
B
BAM Back Administration Module
BID Board Inward Dialing
BRA Basic Rate Adaptation
BRI Basic Rate Interface
C
CAS Channel Associated Signaling
CCB Central Control dataBase
CCITT
International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative
Committee
CCS7 Common Channel Signaling no.7
CCW Cancel Call Waiting
CDB Central DataBase
CDP Central Database Processing board
CF Call Forwarding services
CFB Call Forwarding Busy
CFBH Call Forward Busy of Hunting group service
CFNR Call Forwarding No Reply
CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional
CFUH Call Forward Unconditional of Hunting group service
CH Call Hold
CID Caller Identification Display
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-2
CLI Calling Line Identification
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction
CM Communication Module
CNAM Caller Name Display
COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction
CONF Conference Calling
CPE Customer Premises Equipment
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CW Call Waiting
D
DDI Direct Dial In
DDN Digital Data Network
DDS Do-not-Disturb Service
DEL Law Analog Subscriber Line Board
DID Direct Inward Dialing
DIN Decode Interface Board
DOD1 Direct Outward Dialing-1
DOD2 Direct Outward Dialing-2
DP Detection Point
DR Duplex Ringing
DSL Digital Subscriber Line board
DSP Digital Signal Process
DSS1 Digital Subscriber Signaling No.1
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR Dual Tone Transmit/Receive Board
E
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
FR Frame Relay
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
G
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-3
GUI Graphic User Interface
H
HW Highway
I
IAM Initial Address Message
ID Identification
IDN Integrated Digital telephone Network
IDT Internal Digital Trunk
IN Intelligent Network
IP Internet Protocol
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISP Internet Service Provider
ISPBX ISDN PBX
ISUP ISDN User Part
ITU International Telecommunications Union
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
L
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light Emitting Diode
M
MCID Malicious Call Identification
MML Man Machine Language
MPU Main Processor Unit Board
MSN Multiple Subscriber Number
MWI Message Waiting Indicator
MWN Message Waiting Notification
N
NI Network Interface
N-ISDN Narrow-band ISDN
NN Network Number
NOD Node Communication Board
NP Number Portability
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-4
O
OPT Local Optical Interface Board
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
P
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PBX Private Branch Exchange
PC Personal Computer
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PHI Packet Handling Interface
PIN Personal Identification Number
PLL Permanent Logic Link
PPS Pre-Paid Service
PRA Primary Rate Adaptation
PRI Primary Rate Interface
PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PTT Postal, Telegraph and Telephone
PVC Permanent Virtual Channel
R
RACF Remote Activation of Call Forwarding service
RSA Remote RSA Interface Board
RSM Remote Switching Module
S
SCP Service Control Point
SIG Signal Tone Board
SM Switching Module
SPBX Special Private Branch Exchange
SPC Service Processing Board
SPD Special Tone Board
SPM Service Processing Module
SPT Special Tone Board
SQL Structured Query Language
SRC Shared Resource Board
Operation Manual Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-5
SRM Specialized Resource Module
SS7 CCITT Signaling System No.7
SSP Service Switching Point
SUB Sub-addressing service
T
TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier
TP Terminal Portability
TS TimeSlot
TUP Telephone User Part
TV Television
U
UP User Parts
UUI User-to-User Information
UUS User-to-User Signaling
V
VC Virtual Channel
VM Voice Mailbox
W
WAC Wide Area Centrex

You might also like